• Share
  • Email
  • Embed
  • Like
  • Save
  • Private Content
2013 Dodge Grand Caravan Owner's Manual
 

2013 Dodge Grand Caravan Owner's Manual

on

  • 12,227 views

2013 Dodge Grand Caravan Owner's Manual, Naples Dodge Chrysler Jeep Ram, Naples, Bonita Springs, Fort Myers, Florida. www.naplesdodge.com

2013 Dodge Grand Caravan Owner's Manual, Naples Dodge Chrysler Jeep Ram, Naples, Bonita Springs, Fort Myers, Florida. www.naplesdodge.com

Statistics

Views

Total Views
12,227
Views on SlideShare
12,227
Embed Views
0

Actions

Likes
1
Downloads
15
Comments
0

0 Embeds 0

No embeds

Accessibility

Categories

Upload Details

Uploaded via as Adobe PDF

Usage Rights

© All Rights Reserved

Report content

Flagged as inappropriate Flag as inappropriate
Flag as inappropriate

Select your reason for flagging this presentation as inappropriate.

Cancel
  • Full Name Full Name Comment goes here.
    Are you sure you want to
    Your message goes here
    Processing…
Post Comment
Edit your comment

    2013 Dodge Grand Caravan Owner's Manual 2013 Dodge Grand Caravan Owner's Manual Presentation Transcript

    • 2013OWNER’S MANUAL Grand Caravan
    • VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADAWith respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name This manual illustrates and describes the operation ofChrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the features and equipment that are either standard or optionalname Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available orDRIVING AND ALCOHOL were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard anyDrunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of features and equipment described in this manual that areaccidents. not on this vehicle.Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with bloodalcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes indrinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking design and specifications, and/or make additions to ordriver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation. improvements to its products without imposing any obliga- tion upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. WARNING! Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been Copyright © 2012 Chrysler Group LLC drinking. Never drink and then drive.
    • SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 3 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 4 5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 5 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541 6 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 7 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625 8 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631 910 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641 10
    • INTRODUCTION 1CONTENTSⅥ INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Ⅵ VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6Ⅵ HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Ⅵ VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7Ⅵ WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
    • 4 INTRODUCTIONINTRODUCTION When it comes to service, remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group nicians and genuine MOPAR௡ parts, and cares aboutLLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision your satisfaction.workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - allessentials that are traditional to our vehicles. HOW TO USE THIS MANUALThis Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis- Consult the Table of Contents to determine which sectiontance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint contains the information you desire.you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various Since the specification of your vehicle depends on thecustomer-oriented documents. Please take the time to items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions andread these publications carefully. Following the instruc- illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.tions and recommendations in this manual will help The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manualassure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. contains a complete listing of all subjects.NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of theshould be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughouting and remain with the vehicle when sold. this Owner’s Manual:
    • INTRODUCTION 5 1
    • 6 INTRODUCTIONWARNINGS AND CAUTIONSThis Owners Manual contains WARNINGS againstoperating procedures that could result in a collision orbodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If youdo not read this entire Owners Manual, you may missimportant information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-tions.VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBERThe Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on theleft front corner of the instrument panel, visible through Vehicle Identification Numberthe windshield. This number also appears stamped onthe right sliding door sill under the sill moulding andprinted on the Automobile Information Disclosure Labelaffixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle regis-tration and title.
    • INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS 1 WARNING! Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Stamped VIN LocationNOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLECONTENTS 2Ⅵ A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Ⅵ ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .19 ▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Ⅵ REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 ▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 ▫ Using The RKE Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 ▫ Removing Key Fob From Ignition . . . . . . . . . .14 Ⅵ REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — ▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29Ⅵ SENTRY KEY௡ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 ▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 ▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Ⅵ DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33Ⅵ VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — ▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 ▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .35 ▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
    • 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEⅥ WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 ▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 ▫ Power Vent Windows — If Equipped . . . . . . . .38 ▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 ▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 ▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) . . .66Ⅵ SLIDING SIDE DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 ▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert௡) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 ▫ Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped . . . . . .44 ▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .71 ▫ Sliding Side Door Child Protection Lock . . . . . .48 ▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72Ⅵ LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 ▫ Supplemental Restraint System ▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 (SRS) — Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72Ⅵ OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 ▫ Air Bag System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 ▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . .75 ▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . .64 ▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . .79 ▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — ▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 ▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11Ⅵ COMMERCIAL CARGO VEHICLES Ⅵ SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 (NO FACTORY INSTALLED REAR SEATS) — ▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 ▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 2 ▫ Restraining Infants And Small Children In Commercial Cargo Vehicles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 ▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117Ⅵ ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .115 ▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
    • 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEA WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYSYour vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This systemconsists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) withintegral ignition switch. You can insert the Key Fob intothe ignition switch with either side up.Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similarly toan ignition switch. It has four operating positions, threewith detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detentpositions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)position is a spring-loaded momentary contact position.When released from the START position, the switch 1 — OFFautomatically returns to the ON/RUN position. 2 — ACCESSORY 3 — ON/RUN 4 — START
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13Key FobThe Key Fob operates the ignition switch. Insert thesquare end of the key fob into the ignition switch locatedon the instrument panel and rotate to the desired posi- 2tion. It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in therear of the Key Fob.The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicleshould the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmittergo dead. The emergency key is also for locking the lowerglove compartment. You can keep the emergency keywith you when valet parking. Emergency Key RemovalTo remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency keyat the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and into the lock cylinder with either side up.then pull the key out with your other hand.
    • 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLERemoving Key Fob From Ignition WARNING! (Continued)Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the Key Fob to the • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended isOFF position and then remove the Key Fob. dangerous for a number of reasons. A child orNOTE: Power window switches will also remain active others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been dren should be warned not to touch the parkingturned to OFF, depending upon the accessory delay brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.setting. Opening the front door will cancel this feature. • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not WARNING! leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could operate power windows, other con- • Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking trols, or move the vehicle. brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and push • Do not leave children or animals inside parked ignition button to place ignition in OFF position. vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may When leaving the vehicle, always lock your ve- cause serious injury or death. hicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. (Continued)
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 SENTRY KEYா CAUTION! The Sentry Key௡ Immobilizer system prevents unauthor- An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock all system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation 2 doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.Key-In-Ignition ReminderOpening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the The system uses Key Fob with factory-mated Remoteignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC, Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignitiona chime will sound to remind you to remove the key. Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to theNOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds when vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Thethe Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition system will shut the engine off in two seconds if anposition. invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine. After turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN posi- tion, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
    • 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEelectronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after Replacement Keysthe bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to theKey Fob to start the engine. Either of these conditions will vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate theresult in the engine being shut off after two seconds. vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, itIf the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal cannot be reprogrammed to any other vehicle.vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 sec-onds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. CAUTION!Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon aspossible by an authorized dealer. Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. CAUTION! At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided The Sentry Key௡ Immobilizer system is not compat- with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN). ible with some after-market remote starting systems. Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs. problems and loss of security protection. Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho- rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming aAll of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fobbeen programmed to the vehicle electronics. is one that has never been programmed.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17NOTE: When having the Sentry Key௡ Immobilizer sys- VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPEDtem serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to the The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doorsauthorized dealer. for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unau-Customer Key Programming thorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the 2 interior switches for door locks, power sliding doors andProgramming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be power liftgate are disabled. The Vehicle Security Alarmperformed at an authorized dealer. provides both audible and visible signals, for the firstGeneral Information three minutes, the headlights will turn on, the park lampsThe Sentry Key௡ system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and/or turn signals will flash and Vehicle Security Lightand with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is will flash repeatedly and the horn will sound. For ansubject to the following conditions: additional 15 minutes, only the headlights, park lamps and/or turn signals and Vehicle Security Light will flash.• This device may not cause harmful interference. Rearming Of The System• This device must accept any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause unde- The Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself after the sired operation. 15 additional minutes of headlights and Vehicle Security Light flashing, if the Vehicle Security Alarm has not been disabled. If the condition which initiated the alarm is still
    • 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEpresent, the Vehicle Security Alarm will ignore that To Disarm The Systemcondition and monitor the remaining doors and ignition. The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any ofTo Arm The System the following methods:Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm: • Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.1. Remove the key from the ignition system (refer to ЉStarting ProceduresЉ in ЉStarting And OperatingЉ for • Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF further information). position. Insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn the key to the ON position.•Make sure the vehicle ignition system is ЉOFFЉ and thekey is physically removed from the ignition. NOTE:2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the • The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button vehicle: on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the• Press LOCK on the interior power door lock switch Vehicle Security Alarm.with the driver and/or passenger door open. • The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during• Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry power liftgate entry. Pressing the liftgate button will(RKE) transmitter. not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any3. If any doors are open, close them. door the alarm will sound.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior Tamper Alert power door lock switches will not unlock the doors. If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm inThe Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your your absence, the horn will sound three times and thevehicle; however, you can create conditions where the exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the 2system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ- doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.ously described arming sequences has occurred, the Security System Manual OverrideVehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whetheryou are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock theand open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, doors using the manual door lock plunger.disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPEDIf the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery The courtesy lights will turn on when you use thebecomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock theremain armed when the battery is reconnected; the doors or open any door.exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If thisoccurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur- ther information.
    • 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEThe lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds, using a hand-held Key Fob with RKE transmitter. Theor they will immediately fade to off once the ignition RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at theswitch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position. vehicle to activate the system.NOTE: NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into the ignition switch disables the system from responding• The front courtesy overhead console and door cour- to any button presses from that RKE transmitter. Driving tesy lights will not turn off if the dimmer control is in at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system the “Dome ON” position (extreme top position). from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all• The illuminated entry system will not operate if the RKE transmitters. dimmer control is in the “dome defeat” position Two RKE transmitters may be supplied with the vehicle. (extreme bottom position). Vehicles built without the powered options will beREMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — equipped from the factory with three-button RKE trans-IF EQUIPPED mitters, and those built with power options will be equipped with up to seven-button RKE transmitters.This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors andliftgate, and activate the Panic Alarm, optional power Using The RKE Transmitterliftgate, left power sliding door, and right power sliding Three-button RKE transmitters will provide basic UN-door from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) LOCK, LOCK and PANIC functions.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 2 Key Fob With Three-Button RKE Transmitter Key Fob With Seven-Button RKE TransmitterSeven-button RKE transmitters will provide functions Remote Unlock Doors And Liftgatethat allow the same basic operation as the three-button,but may also be used to operate the power liftgate Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE(optional), power sliding doors, Remote Start feature transmitter once to unlock the driver’s side or twice to(optional). Some features can be programmed to the unlock all doors and liftgate. This will also turn on thecustomers preferences. For example, flash headlights or Illuminated Entry system.sound horn on LOCK.
    • 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLERemote Key Unlock On First Press 2. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longerThis feature lets you program the system to unlock either than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCKthe driver’s side, or all doors, on the first press of the button while still holding the LOCK button.UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter: 3. Release both buttons at the same time.NOTE: 4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-• For vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Infor- ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE trans- mation Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor- mitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and mation Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer- the Key Fob removed. Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. 5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, the Remote its previous setting. Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled by perform- NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit- ing the following steps: ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the1. Perform this operation while standing outside the Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle vehicle. Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23Remote Lock Doors And Liftgate • For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the following steps:Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-ter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights 1. Perform this operation while standing outside thewill flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the vehicle. 2signal. 2. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans-Sound Horn With Remote Lock mitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer thanThis feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors 10 seconds. Then, press the PANIC button while stillare locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be holding the LOCK button.turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, 3. Release both buttons at the same time.proceed as follows: 4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec- ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key Fob Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Un- removed. derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor- mation. 5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting.
    • 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLENOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit- NOTE:ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle • When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pressing theSecurity Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security PANIC button a second time, you may have to moveAlarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the closer to the vehicle due to the Radio Frequency (RF)UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security noises of the system.Alarm. • The Panic Alarm cannot be activated if the engine isUsing The Panic Alarm running.To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and holdthe PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one Power Open/Close Power Liftgate — If Equippedsecond and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the Press the LIFTGATE button twice on the RKE transmitterheadlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse within five seconds to Open/Close the Power Liftgate. Ifon and off, and the interior lights will turn on. the button is pushed while the liftgate is being power closed, the liftgate will reverse to the full open position.The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unlessyou turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second The power liftgate may also be opened and closed bytime or if the vehicle is driven above 5 mph (8 km/h). pressing the LIFTGATE button located on the overhead console.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25If equipped with a rear interior switch on the left rear If the vehicle is locked and the Vehicle Security Alarm ispillar, pushing this switch once will close the liftgate only. armed, pressing the LEFT Power Sliding Door button twiceThe liftgate cannot be opened from this switch. unlocks the power sliding door and disarms Vehicle Secu- rity Alarm. 2If the vehicle is locked and Vehicle Security Alarm isarmed, using RKE transmitter to open the power liftgate Power Open/Close Right Power Sliding Door —does not unlock the vehicle or disarm the Vehicle Security If EquippedAlarm. Press the RIGHT Power Sliding Door button twice on thePower Open/Close Left Power Sliding Door — RKE transmitter within five seconds to Power Open/CloseIf Equipped the Right Power Sliding Door. If the button on the RKE transmitter is pushed while the door is being power-closed,Press the LEFT Power Sliding Door button twice on the the door will reverse to the full open position.RKE transmitter within five seconds to Power Open/Closethe Left Power Sliding Door. If the button on the RKE If the vehicle is locked and the Vehicle Security Alarm istransmitter is pushed while the door is being power-closed, armed, pressing the RIGHT Power Sliding Door buttonthe door will reverse to the full open position. twice unlocks the power sliding door and disarms Vehicle Security Alarm.
    • 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLETurn Off Flash Lights With RKE Lock — 2. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmedIf Equipped RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCKThis feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash whenthe doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit- button while still holding the UNLOCK button.ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change 3. Release both buttons at the same time.the current setting, proceed as follows: 4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec- ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE trans- tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal mitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in the Key Fob removed. “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further 5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to information. its previous setting.• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit- following steps: ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle1. Perform this operation while standing outside the Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security vehicle. Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27Programming Additional TransmittersIf you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,contact your authorized dealer for details.Transmitter Battery Replacement 2The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032battery.NOTE:• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back Emergency Key Removal housing or the printed circuit board.1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical latch at the top of the RKE transmitter sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.
    • 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the seal during removal. Separating RKE Transmitter 3. Remove and replace the battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover. Inserting Emergency Key Into Slot Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 294. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED halves together. This system uses the Remote Keyless EntryGeneral Information (RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve-This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and niently from outside the vehicle while still 2 maintaining security. The system has a range ofRSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the approximately 300 ft (91 m).following conditions:• This device may not cause harmful interference. NOTE:• This device must accept any interference received, • The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic including interference that may cause undesired op- transmission to be equipped with Remote Start. eration. • Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob mayIf your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal reduce this range.distance, check for these two conditions.1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected life of the battery is approximately three years.2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
    • 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEHow To Use Remote Start • System not disabled from previous remote start eventAll of the following conditions must be met before the • Vehicle theft alarm not activeengine will Remote Start: • Ignition in Off position• Shift lever in PARK• Doors closed WARNING!• Hood closed • Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-• Liftgate closed oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon• Hazard switch off Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in- jury or death when inhaled.• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed) • Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters• Ignition key removed from ignition switch away from children. Operation of the Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other controls• Battery at an acceptable charge level could cause serious injury or death.• RKE PANIC button not pressed
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle To Enter Remote Start ModeInformation Center (EVIC) — If Equipped Press and release the REMOTE START button onThe following messages will display in the EVIC if the the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds.vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema- The vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights 2turely: will flash and horn will chirp twice (if pro- grammed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle will• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar NOTE:• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low • If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start will automatically lock the doors.• Remote Start Aborted — L/Gate Ajar • The park lights will turn on and remain on during• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset Remote Start mode.The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned • For security, power window and power sunroof op-to the ON/RUN position. eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode. • The engine can be started two consecutive 15-minute cycles with the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition switch must be turned to the ON/RUN position.
    • 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLETo Enter the Vehicle After Remote Start NOTE:To enter the vehicle while the engine is running during a • The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN positionRemote Start, you must first unlock the vehicle using the in order to drive the vehicle.UNLOCK button on the transmitter. After the vehicle is • The message “Remote Start Active — Key To Run” willunlocked, you can enter the vehicle, insert the Key Fob display in the EVIC until you insert and turn the key tointo the ignition switch and turn it to the ON/RUN ON/RUN position. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-position, otherwise the engine will shut off at the end of mation Center (EVIC)” for further information.15-minute cycle.To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Cancel Remote StartBefore the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the followingthe UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock occur:the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if • The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpmequipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn the • Any engine warning lights come onswitch to the ON/RUN position. • Low Fuel Light turns on • The hood is opened
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33• The hazard switch is pressed When To Reset Remote Start• The shift lever is moved out of PARK The vehicle can be started remotely up to a maximum of two times. The vehicle is also allowed a maximum of one• The engine is allowed to run for the entire 15-minute failed start, where the Remote Starting sequence was 2 cycle initiated but the engine stopped cranking without start-• The brake pedal is pressed ing. After either of these conditions, or if the Vehicle Security Alarm system is alarming, or if the PANICTo Turn Off The Engine While In Remote Start button was pressed, the vehicle must be reset insert theMode Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn the switch toPress and release the REMOTE START button 1 time or the ON/RUN position.allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle. DOOR LOCKSNOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns while in theRemote Start Mode, the system will not allow the Remote Manual Door LocksStart button to shut down the engine for 2 seconds after Lock the front doors by pushing down on the lock knobsreceiving a valid Remote Start request. on each door trim panel.
    • 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEIf the lock knob is down when you shut either front door, If the lock knob is rearward when you shut either sidethe door will lock. Make sure the keys are not inside the sliding door, the door will lock. Make sure the keys arevehicle before closing the door. not inside the vehicle before closing the door. Manual Door Lock Sliding Door Lock
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 Power Door Locks — If Equipped WARNING! A power door lock switch is on each front door trim• For personal security and safety in the event of an panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors. collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as 2 well as when you park and leave the vehicle.• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil- dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not Driver Power Door Lock Switches leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could operate power windows, other con- trols, or move the vehicle.
    • 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEIf you press the power door lock switch while the KeyFob is in the ignition, and any front door is open, thepower locks will not operate. This prevents you fromaccidentally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removingthe Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks tooperate. A chime will sound if the Key Fob is in theignition switch and a door is open, as a reminder toremove the Key Fob. Front Passenger Power Door Switches 1 - Window Open/Close 2 - Power Door Locks If you press the power door lock switch while the sliding door is open, the sliding door will lock.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature will not operate if there is any manual operation of the powerWhen enabled, the door locks will lock automatically door locks (lock or unlock).when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). Theauto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your On vehicles equipped with the optional Electronic Ve- 2authorized dealer per written request of the customer. hicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “ElectronicPlease see your authorized dealer for service. Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “UnderstandingUnlock Doors Automatically On Exit — Your Instrument Panel” for further information.If EquippedThe Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature unlocks NOTE: Use the Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mphall of the vehicle doors when any door is opened. This (24 km/h) and Unlock Doors Automatically On Exitwill occur only after the shift lever has been shifted into features in accordance with local laws.the PARK position, after the vehicle has been driven (theshift lever has been shifted out of PARK and all doorsclosed).
    • 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEWINDOWS Power WindowsPower Vent Windows — If Equipped You can control either the front or rear windows using switches located on the driver’s door trim panel. TheThe Power Vent Window Switch located on the driver’s switches will operate only when the ignition switch isdoor trim panel allows the driver to operate the two vent in the ON/RUN or ACC position and during powerwindows from the driver’s seat. accessory delay. Power Vent Window Switch Open/Close Driver’s Power Window Switches
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39NOTE: Power Window switches will also remain activefor up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has beenturned to OFF, depending upon the accessory delaysetting. Opening a front door will cancel this feature. 2Power Window Lockout Switch — If EquippedThe driver may lock out the rear power windows bydepressing the bar switch just below the power windowswitches. Power Window Lockout Switch Front Passenger Power Window Switch There is a single switch on the front passenger’s door trim panel which operates the passenger door window and a set of switches that lock and unlock all doors. The
    • 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEswitches will operate only when the ignition switch is Auto-Down Feature — If Equippedin the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power The front window switches may be equipped with anaccessory delay. Auto-Down feature. Press the window switch past the detent, release, and the window will go down automati- cally. To open the window part way, press the window switch part way and release it when you want the window to stop. The power window switches remain active for up to 10 minutes (depending on the accessory delay setting) after the ignition switch has been turned to OFF. Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature. Front Passenger Power Door Switches1 - Window Open/Close2 - Power Door Locks
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection — • Any impact due to rough road conditions may triggerIf Equipped the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto-The front driver and front passenger switches may be closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to theequipped with an Auto Up feature. Lift the window first detent and hold to close window manually. 2switch fully upward to the second detent, release, and thewindow will go up automatically. WARNING!To stop the window from going all the way up during the There is no anti-pinch protection when the windowAuto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly. is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects fromTo close the window part way, lift the window switch to the window path before closing.the first detent and release when you want the window tostop. Auto Up Reset — If EquippedNOTE: To reactivate the Auto Up feature, perform the following steps after vehicle power is restored:• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto- closure, it will reverse direction and then go back down. 1. Pull the window switch up to close the window Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again completely and continue to hold the switch up for an to close the window. additional two seconds after the window is closed.
    • 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open.Sliding Side Door Power Window Switch —If EquippedSecond row passengers may open and close the slidingdoor window by a single switch on the door handleassembly.The switches will operate only when the ignition switchis in the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power Sliding Door Power Window Switchaccessory delay. NOTE: The sliding door windows do not fully open,NOTE: The switches will not operate if the driver has stopping several inches above the window sill.activated the Power Window Lockout.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43Wind Buffeting To keep your door operating properly, observe the fol- lowing guidelines:Wind buffeting can be described as the perception ofpressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the • Always open the door smoothly.ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the • Avoid high impacts against the door stop when open- 2windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain ing the door. This is very important when your vehicleopen or partially open positions. This is a normal occur- is parked on an incline as the door will slide faster inrence and can be minimized. If the rear windows are the downhill direction.open and buffeting occurs, open the front and rearwindows together to minimize the buffeting. If the • There is a hold-open latch that is activated when thebuffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun- sliding door is fully opened. This latch will keep yourroof opening to minimize the buffeting. sliding door open on any incline. To close the sliding door after the hold-open latch is activated, you mustSLIDING SIDE DOOR rock the inside handle forward or pull outward on the exterior handle.The sliding door may be opened from the inside or theoutside. Pull outward on the exterior handle to open the Always make sure that the sliding door is fully latchedsliding door. The sliding door inside handle functions by anytime the vehicle is in motion.rocking forward and back. Rocking the handle back-wards opens the door and rocking forward releases thehold open latch in order to close the door.
    • 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLENOTE: The left side sliding door cannot be opened Press the button on the RKE transmitter twice withinwhile the fuel door is open. This feature operates only 5 seconds to open a power sliding door. When the door iswhen the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the fully open, pressing the button twice within 5 seconds afuel door. second time will close the door.Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped There are power sliding side door switches located on the b-pillar trim panel, just in front of the power sliding door The power sliding door may be opened or for the rear seat passengers and in the overhead console closed manually or by using the buttons on the for the driver and passengers. Pressing the switch once RKE transmitter, overhead console switch, or will open the power sliding door. If the switch is pressed rear door switch. Pulling the inside or outside while the door is under a power cycle, the door willpower sliding door handle will also power open or close reverse direction.the power sliding door. NOTE: The power sliding side door must be unlockedNOTE: Pulling the outside power sliding door handle a before the power sliding door switches will operate.second time while the sliding door is power opening orpower closing will allow the sliding door to be opened orclosed manually.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding doors from the rear seats, press the power sliding door master lock button, located in the overhead console, to disable the switches and handles for the rear seat passen- 2 gers. NOTE: • The power sliding side door switches will not open the power sliding door if the shift lever is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h). To close the power sliding door with the shift lever in gear and vehicle speed at 0 mph (0 km/h), the brake must be Power Sliding Door Switch pressed.If the inside or outside door handles are used while the • If anything obstructs the power sliding side door whilepower sliding side door is activated, the power sliding it is closing or opening, the door will automaticallydoor feature will be canceled and will go into manual reverse to the closed or open position, provided itmode. meets sufficient resistance.
    • 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE• If the power sliding side door is not in the full open or Power Sliding Side Door Open Flash close position, it will fully open when a power sliding The left and right exterior hazard lights will flash for door switch is pressed. To close the door, wait until it 12 seconds when either sliding door is opened. This will is fully open and then press the switch again. alert other drivers in the area that passenger(s) could be• If the power sliding door encounters multiple obstruc- entering or exiting the vehicle. tions within the same cycle, the system will automati- The Sliding Side Door Open Flash can be enabled or cally stop, the power sliding door motor will make a disabled by performing the following procedure: clicking sound until the door has no further movement. 1. Place the Key Fob in the ignition switch. This clicking sound can be stopped by pulling the inside or outside handle. If this condition occurs, no damage is 2. Cycle the ignition switch from ON/RUN to OFF five done to the power sliding door motor. The power sliding times ending in the ON/RUN position (do not start door must be opened or closed manually. the engine). 3. Within 10 seconds of the final cycle, press the HAZ- WARNING! ARD switch ON. You, or others, could be injured if caught in the path 4. A single chime will sound to signify that you have of the sliding door. Make sure the door path is clear successfully completed the programming. before closing the door. You can turn the feature back on by repeating the previous procedure.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47Power Sliding Side Door Master Lock SwitchTo provide a safer environment for small children ridingin the rear seats, the second row sliding door switchesand handles may be overridden by pressing the OFF side 2of the Master Lock Out Switch located in the frontoverhead console.When the power sliding door master lock switch is in theOFF position, the power sliding side door may not beopened or closed by pressing the switch located on theb-pillar trim panel, just in front of the sliding door oractivating the inside power sliding door handle. Overhead Console Power Sliding Door Master Switch 1 — Left Sliding Door 3 — Right Sliding Door 2 — Liftgate 4 — Master Lock
    • 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLESliding Side Door Child Protection LockTo provide a safer environment for small children ridingin the rear seats, the sliding doors are equipped with aChild Protection Door Lock system.NOTE: When the Child Protection Door Lock system isengaged, the door can be opened only by using theoutside door handle even though the inside door lock isin the unlocked position.To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock1. Open the sliding side door. Child Protection Door Lock2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control inward 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door. (toward the vehicle) to engage the Child Protection Door Lock. NOTE: • After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock, always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49• When the Child Protection Door Lock system is en- WARNING! gaged, (even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked position) the door can be opened only by using the Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision. outside door handle, the RKE transmitter, the switches Remember that the sliding doors can only be opened 2 on the overhead console or the switches located on the from the outside door handle or the switches located trim panel just in front of the power sliding door. on the trim panel just in front of the power sliding• The power sliding side door will operate from the door when the Child Protection Door Locks are switches located on the b-pillar trim panel, just in engaged. front of the power sliding door, regardless of the Child To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock Protection Door Lock lever position. To avoid unin- tentional operation of the power sliding door from 1. Open the sliding side door. the rear seats, press the “OFF” Master Lock Out 2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control outward Switch located in the front overhead console, next to (away from the vehicle) to disengage the Child Pro- the driver. tection Door Lock. 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door (if equipped).
    • 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLENOTE: LIFTGATE• After setting the Child Protection Door Lock system, On vehicles equipped with power locks, the liftgate can always test the door from the inside to make certain it be unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) is in the desired position. transmitter button, or by activating the power door lock switches located on the front doors.• The power sliding side door switches will not open the power sliding doors if the vehicle is in gear or the To open the liftgate, press the liftgate release handle vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h). located on the underside of the license plate bar and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion.• The power sliding door will operate from the outside door handle, the RKE transmitter, the switches on the overhead console, or the switches located on the b-pillar trim panel, just in front of the power sliding door when the shift lever is in PARK, regardless of the child lock lever position.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 The power liftgate may also be opened and closed by pressing the button located on the overhead console. 2 Liftgate Handle LocationPower Liftgate — If EquippedThe power liftgate may be opened manually or by using Overhead Console Master Power Switchthe button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit- 1 — Left Door 3 — Right Doorter. Press the button on the transmitter twice within five 2 — Liftgate 4 — Master Lockseconds, to open the power liftgate. When the liftgate isfully open, pressing the button twice within five seconds,a second time, will close the liftgate.
    • 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEThe power liftgate may be closed by pressing the button, and several audible beeps will occur to signal that thelocated in the upper left trim in the liftgate opening. liftgate is opening or closing.Pushing once will only close the liftgate. This buttoncannot be used to open the liftgate. WARNING! During power operation, personal injury or cargo damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched before driving away. NOTE: • If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically reverse to the closed or open position, provided it meets sufficient resistance. • There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the Rear Power Liftgate Switch liftgate opening. Light pressure anywhere along theseWhen the RKE transmitter button is pressed and the strips will cause the liftgate to return to the openFlash Lights feature is enabled, the tail lights will flash position.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53• During power operation, whether liftgate is fully open • If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions or fully closed, the liftgate chime will beep several within the same cycle, the system will automatically times indicating power operation is in progress. stop and must be opened or closed manually.• The power liftgate must be in the full open or close 2 positions for any of the buttons to operate. If the WARNING! liftgate is not in the full open or close positions, it must • Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous be opened or closed manually. exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your pas-• If the liftgate release button is activated while the sengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle. full open position. • If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,• The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the shift make sure that all windows are closed, and the lever is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph climate control blower switch is set at high speed. (0 km/h). Do not use the recirculation mode.• The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures Gas props support the liftgate in the open position. below −12°F (−24°C) or temperatures above 143°F However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera- (62°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when from the liftgate before pressing any of the power opening the liftgate in cold weather. liftgate buttons.
    • 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEOCCUPANT RESTRAINTS • An energy-absorbing steering column and steeringSome of the most important safety features in your wheelvehicle are the restraint systems: • Knee bolster for front passenger seat occupant• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating • Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may positions enhance occupant protection by managing occupant• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front energy during an impact event passenger • All seat belt systems (except the driver’s and third row center) include Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs),• Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located on top of the front seats (integrated into the head which lock the seat belt webbing into position by restraint) — if equipped extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag secure a large item in a seat• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) Please pay close attention to the information in this section. that span the front, second, and third row seating for It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to the driver and passengers seated next to a window keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized WARNING!seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tetherfor CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold Infants in rear facing child restraints should neverinfant and child restraint systems. For more information ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger 2on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment canCHildren (LATCH). cause severe injury or death to infants in that position.NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seatinflator design. This allows the air bag to have different belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should berates of inflation based on several factors, including the secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-severity and type of collision. positioning booster seats. Older children who do not useHere are some simple steps you can take to minimize the child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats shouldrisk of harm from a deploying air bag: ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride their arm. buckled up in a rear seat.
    • 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEIf a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child 5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to beseat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat modified to accommodate a disabled person, contactas far back as possible and use the proper child restraint. the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided(Refer to “Child Restraints”) under ؆If You Need Assistance؆.You should read the instructions provided with yourchild restraint to make sure that you are using it properly. WARNING!2. All occupants should always wear their lap and • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more shoulder belts properly. severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In3. The driver and front passenger seats should be some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Always wear your seat belts even though you have Front Air Bags room to inflate. air bags.4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the (Continued) side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument • Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and/or Seat-Mounted could cause serious injury, including death. Air Side Air Bag (SAB) during deployment could cause 2 Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably you to be severely injured or killed. extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel. Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver (SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) also and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or far away from home or on your own street. window. Sit upright in the center of the seat. Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some much greater injuries if you are not properly buck- of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should vehicle are buckled up properly. be belted at all times. (Continued)
    • 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLELap/Shoulder Belts WARNING! (Continued)All seats in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder • Do not allow people to ride in any area of yourbelts. vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.The belt webbing in the retractor is designed to lock • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat andduring very sudden stops or collisions. This feature using a seat belt properly.allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with • Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seatyou under normal conditions. However, in a collision the belts are designed to go around the large bones ofbelt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the your body. These are the strongest parts of yourinside of the vehicle or being thrown out. body and can take the forces of a collision the best. • Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make WARNING! your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers these areas are more likely to be seriously injured safe, too. or killed. (Continued) (Continued)
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 WARNING! (Continued) • Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. 2 Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size.Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat.2. The seat belt latch plate is near the seatback of the Pulling Out Belt and Latch Plate front seats and next to your arm in the rear seats. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap.
    • 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch WARNING! plate into the buckle until you hear a “click”.• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your stron- gest bones will take the force in a collision.• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together. Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 WARNING! • A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride 2 too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you. • A belt that is too loose will not protect you prop- erly. In a sudden stop you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your Removing Slack From Belt abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
    • 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to WARNING! allow the belt to retract fully. • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be WARNING! at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as pos- A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and sible and keep it snug. leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system • A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assem- vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immedi- blies must be replaced after a collision if they have ately and have it fixed. been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is Third Row Center Shoulder Belt Instructions comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retrac- The shoulder belt for the third row center seat is located tor will withdraw any slack in the belt. in the headliner slightly behind the third row seat.6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. Pull the strap down and secure the small latch plate of The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. the lap belt into the small buckle until you hear a “click”.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it iscomfortable and not resting on your neck. When the beltis long enough to fit , insert the large latch plate into thebuckle until you hear a “click.” The retractor should 2withdraw any slack in the belt.To release the small latch plate, position the end of thelarge latch plate against the red button on the small latchplate and push upward. Reinstall the latch plates into theheadliner.Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt AnchorageIn the front seats and the second row outboard seats, the Adjustable Anchorageshoulder belt anchorage can be adjusted upward or down- As a guide, if you are shorter than average you willward to help position the belt away from your neck. The prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than averageupper anchorage can be adjusted upward by pushing you will prefer a higher position. When you release theanywhere on the anchorage. To move the anchorage down- anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure thatward, squeeze the actuation buttons while simultaneously it is locked in position.pushing down on the anchorage assembly.
    • 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLESeat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions If the passenger seating position is equipped with anThe seat belts in the passenger seating positions are ALR and is being used for normal usage:equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortablya cinching latch plate which are used to secure a child wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to notrestraint system. For additional information refer to activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbingunder the “Child Restraint” section. The chart below to retract completely in this case and then carefully pulldefines the type of feature for each seating position. out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort- ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the Driver Center Passenger latch plate into the buckle until you hear a Љclick.Љ First Row N/A N/A ALR Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — Second Row ALR N/A ALR If Equipped Third Row ALR Cinch ALR In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-• N/A — Not Applicable locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail-• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor able on all passenger-seating positions with a combi- nation lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating WARNING!position that has a belt with this feature. Children12 years old and under should always be properly • The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced ifrestrained in the rear seat. the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not 2How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode working properly when checked according to the1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. procedures in the Service Manual. • Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until could increase the risk of injury in collisions. the entire belt is extracted.3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will Energy Management Feature hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy now in the Automatic Locking Mode. Management feature in the front seating positions to helpHow To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on collision.Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow itto retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that isMode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. Thislocking mode. feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant’s chest.
    • 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLESeat Belt Pretensioners Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)The seat belts for both front seating positions are These head restraints are passive, deployable compo-equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readilyremove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. identified by any markings, only through visual inspec-These devices may improve the performance of the seat tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be splitbelt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant in two halves, with the front half being soft foam andearly in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occu- trim, the back half being decorative plastic.pants, including those in child restraints. How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) WorkNOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determinesbelt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be whether the severity, or type of rear impact will requireworn snugly and positioned properly. the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rearThe pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re- impact requires deployment, both the driver and frontstraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten- passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front halfa deployed air bag must be replaced immediately. of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67This system is designed to help prevent or reduce theextent of injuries to the driver and front passenger incertain types of rear impacts.NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may 2not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.However if during a front impact, a secondary rearimpact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the sever-ity and type of the impact. Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components 1 — Head Restraint Front Half 3 — Head Restraint Back Half (Soft Foam and Trim) (Decorative Plastic Rear Cover) 2 — Seatback 4 — Head Restraint Guide Tubes
    • 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat. CAUTION! All occupants, including the driver, should not oper- ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a collision.NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting andpositioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting ActiveHead Restraints” in “Understanding The Features OfYour Vehicle”.Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR) Hand Positioning Points On AHRIf the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision, 2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR atyou must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and a comfortable position.front passenger seat. You can recognize when the ActiveHead Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they 3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of thehave moved forward (as shown in step three of the vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.resetting procedure).
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 21 — Downward Movement 3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism2 — Rearward Movement
    • 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock • For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints into the back decorative plastic half. checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer. Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlertா) BeltAlert௡ is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger (if equipped with front passenger BeltAlert௡) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are fastened. The BeltAlert௡ warning sequence begins after the vehicle AHR In Reset Position speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat BeltNOTE: Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.• If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer. duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened. After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts NOTE: Although BeltAlert௡ has been deactivated, theare fastened. The driver should instruct all other occu- Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminatepants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped withunbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph BeltAlert௡) seat belt remains unfastened. 2(8 km/h), BeltAlert௡ will provide both audio and visual Seat Belts And Pregnant Womennotification. We recommend that pregnant women use the seat beltsThe front passenger seat BeltAlert௡ is not active when the throughout their pregnancies. Keeping the mother safe isfront passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert௡ may be the best way to keep the baby safe.triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the frontpassenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the beltequipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are Keep the belt low so that it does not come across thesecured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed. abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision.BeltAlert௡ can be enabled or disabled by your authorizeddealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deac-tivating BeltAlert௡.
    • 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLESeat Belt Extender Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air BagsIf a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both thewhen the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seatequipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Airdealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. Theextender should be used only if the existing belt is not passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in thelong enough. When it is not required, remove the ex- instrument panel, above the glove compartment. Thetender and store it. words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers. In addition, the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental WARNING! Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column. Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug, and in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the extender when not needed.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 NOTE: The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Air Bags. The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator 2 design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on several factors, including the severity and type of collision. This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position. Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front1 — Driver And Passenger Ad- 2 — Knee Bolster passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whethervanced Front Air Bags the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The3 — Supplemental Driver Side seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of theKnee Air Bag Advanced Front Air Bags.
    • 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEThis vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Air Bag System ComponentsInflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front, Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bagand rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC system components:air bags are located above the side windows and theircovers are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG. • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat- • Air Bag Warning LightMounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced • Steering Wheel and Columnprotection for an occupant during a side impact. The • Instrument PanelSABs are located in the outboard side of the front seats. • Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air BagNOTE: • Knee Impact Bolster• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment. • Driver Advanced Front Air Bag• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an • Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag authorized dealer immediately. • Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75• Front and Side Impact Sensors WARNING!• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch, and Seat Track Position Sensors • No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel, because any such objects 2Advanced Front Air Bag Features could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collisionThe Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides • Do not put anything on or around the air bag coversoutput appropriate to the severity and type of collision as or attempt to open them manually. You may damagedetermined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), the air bags and you could be injured because the airwhich may receive information from the front impact bags may no longer be functional. The protectivesensors. covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating.The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an • Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster inimpact that requires air bag deployment. This low output any way.is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is • Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolsterused for more severe collisions. such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
    • 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLESupplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between theSupplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bagprovide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the leftduring a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right airlabel sewn into the outboard side of the front seats bag only.“ONLY”. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) SABIC air bags may offer side-impact and vehicle roll- over protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure. Each air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side-impact head injuries. The SABIC deploy down- ward, covering both windows on the impact side. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77NOTE: WARNING!• Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners and/or SAB and SABIC air bags on both sides of the • Your vehicle is equipped with left and right vehicle may deploy. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain 2 (SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, high enough to block the location of the SABIC. but they will open during air bag deployment. The area where the SABIC is located should remain• Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during free from any obstructions. deployment could cause you to be severely injured or • Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects killed. between you and the side air bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could beThe system includes side impact sensors that are cali- pushed into you, causing serious injury.brated to deploy the side air bags during impacts thatrequire air bag occupant protection. (Continued)
    • 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Always sit upright as possible with your back against the WARNING! (Continued) seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the appro- • Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do priate sized child restraint, infant restraint or booster seat not have any accessory items installed which will recommended for the size and weight of the child. alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma- Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the enhanced protection and works together with the Driver vehicle for any reason. Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact. • Do not allow occupants to extend any part of their body outside of the window. Knee Impact Bolster The Knee Impact Bolster helps protect the knees of theSAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt front passenger, and position the front occupant for therestraint system. Occupants, including children who are best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bag.up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can beseriously injured or killed. Occupants, especially chil- Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Frontdren, should not lean on or sleep against the door, side Air Bags work with the Supplemental Driver Side Kneewindows, or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags Air Bag and the passenger side knee bolster to provideinflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79improved protection for the driver and front passenger. Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver SideSide air bags also work with seat belts to improve Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional protec-occupant protection. tion by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on several factors, including the 2Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls severity and type of collision. Advanced Front Air BagsOccupant Restraint Controller (ORC) are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side,The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system or rollover collisions.required for this vehicle. The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions,The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/orside air bags in a frontal or side collision is required. including some that may produce substantial vehicleBased on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic damage — for example, some pole collisions, truckORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the otherbags, SABs, Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag, and hand, depending on the type and location of impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes withfront seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending onseveral factors, including the severity and type of impact. little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration.
    • 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEThe side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions. The ORC contains a backup power supply system thatSide air bag deployment will depend on the severity and may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power ortype of collision. it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warningover time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are Light in the instrument panel for approxi-not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should mately four to eight seconds for a self-checkhave deployed. when the ignition is first turned on. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If theSeat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli- ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, itsions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarilyaway from an inflating air bag. or continuously. A single chime will sound if the lightThe ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of comes on again after initial startup.the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru-START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction isposition, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate. tics also record the nature of the malfunction.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 are possible, based on several factors, including the WARNING! collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru- cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to 2 to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned 70 milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. air bag system immediately. The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through theDriver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the airInflator Units bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag InflatorInflator Units are located in the center of the steering Unitwheel and on the right side of the instrument panel. The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit isWhen the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad- located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steeringvanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large column. When the ORC detects a collision requiring thequantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. AAdvanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
    • 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLESupplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag. The trim cover between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflateseparates and folds out of the way allowing the air bag to in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a veryinflate to the full size. The air bag fully inflates in about high speed and with such a high force that it could injure15 to 20 milliseconds. The Supplemental Driver Side you if you are not seated properly, or if items areKnee Air Bag gas is vented through small vent holes in positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. Thisthe side of the air bag. especially applies to children.Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB) Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable CurtainInflator Units (SABIC) Inflator UnitsThe Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are During collisions where the impact is confined to adesigned to activate only in certain side collisions. particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severityThe ORC determines if a side collision requires the side and type of collision. In these events, the ORC willair bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.collision. A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the sideBased on the severity and type of collision, the side air curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushesbag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be the outside edge of the headliner out of the way andtriggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30 milli-inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space seconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes to
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you Enhanced Accident Response Systemare not belted and seated properly, or if items are In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, ifpositioned in the area where the side curtain air bag the communication network remains intact, and theinflates. This especially applies to children. The side power remains intact, depending on the nature of the 2curtain air bag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when event the ORC will determine whether to have theit is inflated. Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow-Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time, ing functions:vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of Cut off fuel to the engine.whether or not an air bag should have deployed. Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power orNOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SAB and until the ignition key is turned off.SABIC air bags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle. Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as theFront And Side Impact Sensors battery has power or until the ignition key is removed.In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the Unlock the doors automatically.ORC in determining appropriate response to impactevents. In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event, the ignition switch must be changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF.
    • 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEIf A Deployment Occurs • As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of theThe Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate process that generates the non-toxic gas used for airimmediately after deployment. bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate theNOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eyecollisions. This does not mean something is wrong with irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose orthe air bag system. throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle onIf you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-or all of the following may occur: structions for cleaning.• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de- front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those bags will not be in place to protect you. you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING!Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners can not WARNING!protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, 2seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retrac- • Modifications to any part of the air bag systemtor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im- could cause it to fail when you need it. You couldmediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Con- be injured if the air bag system is not there totroller (ORC) system serviced as well. protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards. • It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system. (Continued)
    • 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Air Bag Warning Light WARNING! (Continued)• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag You will want to have the air bags ready to system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may inflate for your protection in a collision. The not function properly if modifications are made. Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any circuits and interconnecting wiring associated air bag system service. If your seat, including your with air bag system electrical components. While the air trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of way (including removal or loosening/tightening of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your the air bag system immediately. authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved • The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on for seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to approximately four to eight seconds when the ignition modify the air bag system for persons with dis- switch is first turned to ON/RUN. abilities, contact your authorized dealer. • The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the approximate four to eight-second interval. • The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period ofrelated gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicleController (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may is designed to record such data as:not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly check 2 • How various systems in your vehicle were operating;the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label locatedon the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper air bag • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety beltsfuses. See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good. were buckled/fastened;Event Data Recorder (EDR) • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in • How fast the vehicle was traveling.certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air These data can help provide a better understanding ofbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
    • 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLENOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a Child Restraintsnon-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at allthe EDR under normal driving conditions and no per- times, including babies and children. Every state in thesonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) United States, and every Canadian province, requiresare recorded. However, other parties, such as law en- that small children ride in proper restraint systems. Thisforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.personally identifying data routinely acquired during acrash investigation. Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crashTo read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is statistics, children are safer when properly restrained inrequired, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. the rear seats rather than in the front.In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,such as law enforcement, that have the special equip- There are different sizes and types of restraints forment, can read the information if they have access to the children from newborn size to the child almost largevehicle or the EDR. enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has WARNING!a label certifying that it meets all applicable SafetyStandards. You should also make sure that you can install In a collision, an unrestrained child can become ait in the vehicle where you will use it. projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to 2NOTE: For additional information, refer to hold even an infant on your lap could become sowww.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. great that you could not hold the child, no matterCanadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s how strong you are. The child and others could bewebsite for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/ badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicleeng/roadsafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
    • 90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLESummary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Child Size, Height, Weight or Age Recommended Type of Child RestraintInfants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or younger Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible and who have not reached the height or Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear weight limits of their child restraint seat of the vehicleSmall Children Children who are at least two years old or Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five- who have out-grown the height or weight point Harness, facing forward in the rear limit of their rear-facing child restraint seat of the vehicleLarger Children Children who have out-grown their Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle forward-facing child restraint, but are too seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat beltChildren Too Large Children 12 years old or younger, who have Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat offor Child Restraints out-grown the height or weight limit of the vehicle their booster seat
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91Infants And Child Restraints WARNING!Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until • Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of anthey reach either the height or weight limit of their rear air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air 2facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can Bag can cause death or serious injury to a childbe used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearwardchild seats. facing infant seat. • Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a rearThe infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the seat.vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth untilthey reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Older Children And Child RestraintsConvertible child seats can be used either rearward- Children who are two years old or who have outgrownfacing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward- facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats andfacing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown tion are for children who are over two years old or whotheir infant carrier but are still less than at least two years have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit ofold. Children should remain rearward-facing until they their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children shouldreach the highest weight or height allowed by theirconvertible child seat.
    • 92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEremain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for WARNING!as long as possible, up to the highest weight or heightallowed by the child seat. • Improper installation can lead to failure of anAll children whose weight or height is above the infant or child restraint. It could come loose in aforward-facing limit for the child seat should use a collision. The child could be badly injured orbelt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’sfit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over directions exactly when installing an infant orthe vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against child restraint.the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster • When your child restraint is not in use, secure it inseat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-in the vehicle by the seat belt. ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93Children Too Large For Booster Seats 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touchingChildren who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt the child’s thighs and not their stomach?comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?over the front of the seat when their back is against the 2seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If thesimple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use thevehicle’s seat belt alone: child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit peri- odically. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face the vehicle seat? or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle.2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the or behind their back. way back?3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder between their neck and arm?
    • 94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLERecommendations For Attaching Child RestraintsRestraint Type Combined Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below Weight of the LATCH – Seat Belt Only LATCH – Seat Belt + Top Child + Child Lower Anchors Lower Anchors Tether Anchor Restraint Only + Top Tether Anchor Rear-Facing Up to 65 lbs X X Child Restraint (29.5 kg) Rear-Facing More than X Child Restraint 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Forward-Facing Up to 65 lbs X X Child Restraint (29.5 kg) Forward-Facing More than X Child Restraint 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-Restraint System age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH- 2 equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for more information.
    • 96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLELATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints InThis Vehicle Second Row Bench Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating Second Row Captains Chairs position Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating Top Tether Anchorage Symbolposition Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97What is the weight limit (child’s 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage systemweight + weight of the child re- until the combined weight of thestraint) for using the LATCH an- child and the child restraint is 65 lbschorage system to attach the child (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether 2restraint? anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).Can the LATCH anchorages and the No Do not use the seat belt when youseat belt be used together to attach a use the LATCH anchorage systemrear-facing or forward-facing child to attach a rear-facing or forward-restraint? facing child restraint.Can a child seat be installed in the N/Acenter position using the innerLATCH lower anchorages?
    • 98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLECan two child restraints be attached No Never “share” a LATCH anchorageusing a common lower LATCH an- with two or more child restraints. Ifchorage? the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchor- ages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.Can the rear-facing child restraint Yes The child seat may touch the back oftouch the back of the front passenger the front passenger seat if the childseat? restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more informa- tion.Can the head restraints be removed? Yes; second row outboard positions only, third row all positions.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99Locating The LATCH Anchorages The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback. They are just visible when 2 you lean into the rear seat to install the childrestraint. You will easily feel them if you run your fingeralong the gap between the seatback and seat cushion. LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Anchorages Shown)
    • 100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE LATCH Anchorages LATCH Anchorages (Third Row 60/40 Anchorages Shown) (Third Row 60/40 Anchorage Shown)Locating The LATCH Anchorages LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. In addition, there are tether strap anchors lo- Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower cated behind each rear seatback, near to the anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the floor. anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a Center Seat LATCHtether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end If a child restraint installed in the center position blocksto attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position,the strap after it is attached to the anchorage. do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the 2Center Seat LATCH – Commercial Cargo Vehicles center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or(No Factory Installed Rear Seats) — If Equipped seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard position. WARNING! WARNING! This vehicle does not have a center seating position. Do not use the center lower LATCH anchorages to Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more install a child seat in the center of the back seat. than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” forAlways follow the directions of the child restraint manu- typical installation instructions.facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all childrestraint systems will be installed as described here. Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu- facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
    • 102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLETo Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint 4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat-1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto- ing position. matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the instructions below. See the section 5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the “Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc- position has. tions to attach a tether anchor.2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the 6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint tether strap of the child seat so that you can more rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle in the straps according to the child restraint manufac- anchorages. turer’s instructions.3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for 7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by that seating position. For some second row seats, you pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) restraint to get a better fit. in any direction.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt WARNING!When using the LATCH attaching system to install achild restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being Improper installation of a child restraint to theused by other occupants or being used to secure child LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re- 2restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directionsinstalling a child restraint using the LATCH system, exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seatthe child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with Beltthe child restraint installation, instead of buckling itbehind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the The seat belts in the passenger seating positions arechild restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Lockingthe seatbelt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Bothseat belts are not toys and that they should not play with types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion ofthem. the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can
    • 104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEbe “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Childwebbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing Restraints in this Vehicleretract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR willmake a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled backinto the retractor. For additional information on ALR,refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description un-der “Occupant Restraints.” The cinching latch plate isdesigned to hold the lap portion of the seatbelt tightwhen webbing is pulled tight and straight through achild restraint’s belt path. Please see the table below andthe following sections for more information about bothtypes of seat belts. Second Row Captains Chair
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105 2Second Row Bench
    • 106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEWhat is the weight limit (child’s Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor whenweight + weight of the child re- using the seat belt to install a for-straint) for using the Tether Anchor ward facing child restraint, up to thewith the seat belt to attach a forward recommended weight limit of thefacing child restraint? child restraint.Can the rear-facing child restraint Yes Contact between the front passengertouch the back of the front passenger seat and the child restraint is allowed,seat? if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.Can the head restraints be removed? Yes; second row outboard positions only, third row all positions.Can the buckle stalk be twisted to Yes In positions with cinching latch platestighten the seat belt against the belt (CINCH), the buckle stalk may bepath of the child restraint? twisted up to 3 full turns. Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107Installing A Child Restraint with a Switchable back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, youAutomatic Locking Retractor (ALR) will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is 2 recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a locked, you should not be able to pull out any web- better fit. bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. lap portion around the child restraint while you push Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path. the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether against the child seat. strap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil-5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of dren (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing attach a tether anchor. out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
    • 108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt “click.” path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) 4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the in any direction. lap portion around the child restraint while you pushAny seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the the child restraint rearward and downward into thebelt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. vehicle seat.Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching 5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and theLatch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to strap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil- dren (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. attach a tether anchor.2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction. path.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tetherbelt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. Anchorage — Second Row Captains ChairsIf the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the 1. Look behind the seating position where you plan tobelt path opening of the child restraint, you may have install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage. 2trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, discon- You may need to move the seat forward to providenect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no topbuckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert tether anchorage for that seating position (see thethe latch plate into the buckle with the release button charts above), move the child restraint to anotherfacing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4 position in the vehicle if one is available.to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child 2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct pathrestraint. for the strap between the anchor and the child seat.If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear headbuckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate route the tether strap under the head restraint andinto the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child between the two posts. If not possible, lower the headrestraint installation tight, try a different seating position. restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint.
    • 110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram. LATCH Anchorages (Third Row 60/40 Anchorage Shown) Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting 4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child (Second Row Anchorage Shown) restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111 Transporting Pets WARNING! Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to An unrestrained pet could be thrown about and possibly increased head motion and possible injury to the injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in 2 child. Use only the anchorage position directly a collision. behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts. make sure the tether strap does not slip into the COMMERCIAL CARGO VEHICLES (NO FACTORY opening between the seatbacks as you remove INSTALLED REAR SEATS) — IF EQUIPPED slack in the strap. Commercial cargo vehicles are not designed for use as a family vehicle and are not intended for carrying children in the front passenger seat. However, if you must carry a child in a vehicle without a rear seat, the passenger seat should be moved to the full rearward position and the child must be in a proper restraint system based on its age, size and weight.
    • 112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! NEVER carry a child in a rear facing infant carrier in a vehicle without rear seats. In a collision, serious injury or death may occur from the deploying pas- senger airbag. Commercial Child Restraint Tether Anchor This vehicle is equipped with a child restraint tether anchor located on the lower rear of the front passenger seat. Use this tether anchor to secure only forward- facing child restraints equipped with an upper tether strap.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 113 • A convertible child seat, one that is designed to be WARNING! used for children who are too heavy for a rearward- Rearward-facing infant restraints must never be se- facing infant seat, may be used IN THE FORWARD cured in the passenger seat of a vehicle with a FACING POSITION ONLY, IT MUST NEVER BE IN- 2 passenger airbag. In a collision, a passenger airbag STALLED FACING TO THE REAR IN A COMMER- may deploy causing severe injury or death to infants CIAL CARGO VEHICLE. When a convertible seat is riding in rearward-facing infant restraints. properly installed facing forward, the vehicle seat should be adjusted to the rear most position.Restraining Infants And Small Children InCommercial Cargo Vehicles • Children more than 40 lbs (18 kg) should be secured in the passenger seat in a child restraint or belt-There are different sizes and types of restraints for positioning booster seat with the seat adjusted to thechildren from newborn size to the child almost large rear most position. Older children who do not useenough for an adult safety belt. Use the restraint that is child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats shouldcorrect for your child: ride properly buckled in the passenger seat with the• The forward-facing child seat is for children from about seat adjusted to the rearmost position. Never allow 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg), and more than one year old. children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.
    • 114 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLETether Installation For Commercial Cargo Vehicles 5. Following the child seat manufacturer’s instructions, tighten the child restraint tether strap.To secure the child restraint upper tether strap to thevehicle, follow the instructions shown: 6. Inspect the tether anchor strap for nicks, abrasions, discoloration, and loose threads. If these, or any other1. Locate the child restraint tether anchor on the lower condition that might affect the performance of the rear of the front passenger seat. strap is observed, DO NOT USE. Contact your autho-2. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions rized dealership for a replacement part. for proper use of connecting the child restraint to the extended tether strap. WARNING!3. Route the tether strap under the head rest. The vehicle tether anchor is designed to be used withNOTE: Ensure that the child restraint tether strap is a child restraint only. It should not be used for anycentered between the headrest supports underneath the other purpose. Before use, inspect the tether anchorhead rest. strap for nicks, abrasions, discoloration, and loose threads. If these or any other condition that might4. Using the hook attached to the child restraint tether affect the performance of the strap is observed, DO strap, attach the child restraint tether strap to the NOT USE that strap. Personal injury may result. Con- metal anchor on the lower rear of the front passenger tact your authorized dealer for a replacement part. seat.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 115ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS CAUTION!A long break-in period is not required for the engine anddrivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle. Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result. 2Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable. first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in andWhile cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri- SAFETY TIPSmental and should be avoided. Transporting PassengersThe engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is ahigh-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGOshould be consistent with anticipated climate conditions AREA.under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recom-mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Mainte-nance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
    • 116 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Exhaust Gas WARNING! • Do not leave children or animals inside parked WARNING! vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon cause serious injury or death. monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, Breathing it can make you unconscious and can inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously follow these safety tips: injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your • Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat confined areas any longer than needed to move belts. your vehicle in or out of the area. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and • If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate using a seat belt properly. open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode. (Continued)
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 117 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The WARNING! (Continued) Vehicle • If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling Seat Belts controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, 2 blower at high speed. frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.The best protection against carbon monoxide entry intothe vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after asystem. collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding beltsystem, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the or retractor condition, replace the belt.vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle isdamaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com- Air Bag Warning Lightplete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, The light should come on and remain on fordamaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open four to eight seconds as a bulb check when theseams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light isto seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, not lit during starting, see your authorizedinspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raisedfor lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
    • 118 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEdealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while WARNING!driving, have the system checked by an authorizeddealer. Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-Defroster sonal injury.Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place • Always make sure that floor mats are properlythe blower control on high speed. You should be able to attached to the floor mat fasteners.feel the air directed against the windshield. See your • Never place or install floor mats or other floorauthorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper- coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properlyable. secured to prevent them from moving and interfer-Floor Mat Safety Information ing with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle.Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your • Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on topvehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area of already installed floor mats. Additional floorunobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they mats and other coverings will reduce the size of thecannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals pedal area and interfere with the pedals.or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. (Continued)
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 119 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside WARNING! (Continued) The Vehicle• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have Tires been removed for cleaning. Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear 2• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob- lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts jects can become trapped under the brake pedal and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges. and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires control. (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.• If required, mounting posts must be properly in- stalled, if not equipped from the factory.Failure to properly follow floor mat installation ormounting can cause interference with the brakepedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss ofcontrol of the vehicle.
    • 120 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLELights Fluid LeaksHave someone observe the operation of brake lights and Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasolinesignal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, orpanel. brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and corrected immediately.Door LatchesCheck for positive closing, latching, and locking.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLECONTENTSⅥ MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 ▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With 3 Memory Seat Only) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .132 ▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . .128 ▫ Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped. . . . . . .132 ▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .129 ▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .133 ▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Ⅵ BLIND SPOT MONITORING — ▫ Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 ▫ Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 ▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . .130 ▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 ▫ Power Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Ⅵ Uconnect௡ Phone — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .143 ▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .132 ▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
    • 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 ▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 ▫ Uconnect௡ Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 ▫ Manual Front/Second Row Seat Adjuster . . . .185 ▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .160 ▫ Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped . . . . . .186 ▫ Things You Should Know About Your ▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 Uconnect௡ Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 ▫ Stow ’n Go௡ Seating — If Equipped . . . . . . . .191 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 ▫ Quad Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198Ⅵ VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . .173 ▫ Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped . . . . . .202 ▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . .173 ▫ Third Row Power Recline — If Equipped. . . . .203 ▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 ▫ Third Row Power Folding Seat — ▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203Ⅵ SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179 ▫ Manually Folding Third Row Seats — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 ▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179 ▫ Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks. . . . . . . . .209 ▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .182
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123Ⅵ DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .210 ▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .219 ▫ Setting Memory Positions And Linking RKE ▫ Dimmer Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 ▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 ▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat ▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 (Available With Memory Seat ONLY). . . . . . . .213 3 ▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222Ⅵ TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .214 ▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222Ⅵ LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 ▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 ▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 ▫ Battery Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 ▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .217 Ⅵ WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS . . . . . .223 ▫ Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped . . .217 ▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 ▫ Headlight Delay — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .217 ▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 ▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218 ▫ Windshield Washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 ▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . .218 ▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
    • 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Rear Wiper And Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Ⅵ PARKSENSE௡ REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 ▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .225 ▫ ParkSense௡ Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235Ⅵ TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .227 ▫ ParkSense௡ Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .235Ⅵ HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 ▫ ParkSense௡ Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236Ⅵ ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .229 ▫ Enabling/Disabling ParkSense௡ . . . . . . . . . . .239Ⅵ ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — ▫ Service The ParkSense௡ Rear Park Assist IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 ▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 ▫ Cleaning The ParkSense௡ System . . . . . . . . . .240 ▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 ▫ ParkSense௡ System Usage Precautions . . . . . . .240 ▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 Ⅵ PARKVIEW௡ REAR BACK UP CAMERA — ▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 ▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 ▫ Turning ParkView௡ On Or Off — With Navigation/Multimedia Radio . . . . . . . .246 ▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 ▫ Turning ParkView௡ On Or Off — ▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .257 Without Navigation/Multimedia Radio . . . . . .246 ▫ Using HomeLink௡ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258Ⅵ OVERHEAD CONSOLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 ▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 ▫ Front Overhead Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 ▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259 ▫ Courtesy/Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247 3 ▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260 ▫ Sunglass Storage (Non-Sunroof Only) . . . . . . .248 Ⅵ POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .260 ▫ Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights — ▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261 If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249 ▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .261 ▫ Rear Overhead Consoles — If Equipped . . . . .250 ▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261Ⅵ GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .251 ▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .262 ▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink௡. . .252 ▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262 ▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 ▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262 ▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .256 ▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262 ▫ Reprogramming A Single HomeLink௡ Button . . .256
    • 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 Ⅵ STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 ▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 ▫ Glove Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 ▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 ▫ Door Trim Panel Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275 ▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 ▫ Driver Seatback Storage — If Equipped . . . . . .276Ⅵ ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS — ▫ Umbrella Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276 IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264 ▫ Second Row Seat Storage Bins —Ⅵ POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . .268 If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277Ⅵ CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270 ▫ Storage Bin Safety Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 ▫ Instrument Panel Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . .270 ▫ Coat Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 ▫ Super Console — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . .271 ▫ Cargo Area Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 ▫ Premium Console Cupholders — Ⅵ CONSOLE FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281 If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 ▫ Basic Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281 ▫ Interior Bottle Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 ▫ Premium Console — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .282 ▫ Smoker’s Package Kit — If Equipped . . . . . . .273
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 ▫ Super Console — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . .286 Ⅵ LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . .290Ⅵ CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 Ⅵ ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . .290 ▫ Rechargeable Flashlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 ▫ Deploying the Crossbars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292Ⅵ REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289 Ⅵ SUN SCREENS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .297 3 ▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
    • 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEMIRRORSInside Day/Night Mirror — If EquippedA two-point pivot system allows for horizontal andvertical adjustment of the mirror. Adjust the mirror tocenter on the view through the rear window.Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the smallcontrol under the mirror to the night position (toward therear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted whileset in the day position (toward the windshield). Manual Rearview Mirror
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129Automatic Dimming Mirror — If EquippedThis mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glarefrom vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on oroff by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A lightto the left of the button will illuminate to indicate whenthe dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right 3of the button does not illuminate.NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle ismoving in reverse. Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION! To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
    • 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEOutside Mirrors Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror —To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) If Equippedto center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust foroverlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror. glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will auto- WARNING! matically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts. Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they Outside Mirrors Folding Feature really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either could cause you to collide with another vehicle or forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have other object. Use your inside mirror when judging three detent positions: the size or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex mirror. • full forward • full rearward and • normal.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131Power Mirrors — If Equipped The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but-The power mirror controls are located on the driver-side tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust adoor trim panel. mirror, press either the L (left) or R (right) to select the mirror that you want to adjust. NOTE: A light in the selected button will illuminate indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted. 3 Using the mirror control switch, press on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move. Left and Right side power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by the optional Driver Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understand- ing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further informa- tion. Power Mirror Controls
    • 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEHeated Mirrors — If Equipped NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not enabled when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This Reverse feature can be enabled or disabled in the Elec- feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Elec-window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur- Programmable Features” in “Understanding Yourther information. Instrument Panel” for further information.Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory Power Folding Mirrors — If EquippedSeat Only) — If Equipped The switch for the power folding mirrors is locatedTilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).positioning which will aid the drivers view of the ground Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in,rearward of the front doors. The driver’s outside mirror pressing the switch a second time will return the mirrorswill move slightly downward from the present position to the normal driving position.when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The driver’soutside mirror will then return to the original position NOTE: If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mphwhen the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE position. (16 km/h) the folding feature will be disabled.Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicleMirrors in Reverse position. speed is equal or greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), they will automatically unfold.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped BLIND SPOT MONITORING — IF EQUIPPEDAn illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor. The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar-To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, tothe mirror cover upward. The lights turn on automati- detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,cally. Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights. motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle. 3 Illuminated Mirror Rear Detection Zones
    • 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEWhen the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will NOTE:momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors • The BSM system does NOT alert the driver aboutto let the driver know that the system is operational. The rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the de-BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any tection zones.forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by modewhen the vehicle is in PARK. • The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visuallyThe BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicleon both sides of the vehicle (11 ft or 3.35 m). The zone and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer orstarts at the outside rear view mirror and extends other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extendsapproximately 20 ft (6 m) to the rear of the vehicle. The beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in theBSM system monitors the detection zones on both sides BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entireof the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approxi- time the vehicle is in a forward gear.mately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert thedriver of vehicles in these areas. The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road contamination so that the BSM system can function properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bum- per stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 3 Sensor Locations BSM Warning LightThe BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the The BSM system monitors the detection zone from threedetection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving tolocated in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue anaudible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume. alert during these types of zone entries.Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
    • 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEEntering From The Side Entering From The RearVehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on eitherside of the vehicle. side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h). Side Monitoring Rear Monitoring
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137Overtaking TrafficIf you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speedof less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains inthe blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warninglight will be illuminated. If the difference in speedbetween the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph 3(16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate. Overtaking/Approaching
    • 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service. Overtaking/Passing Stationary Objects
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are WARNING!traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle inadjacent lanes. The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy- clists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped 3 with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. Opposing Traffic
    • 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLERear Cross PathThe Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid thedriver when backing out of parking spaces where theirvision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceedslowly and cautiously out of the parking space until therear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system willthen have a clear view of the cross traffic and if anoncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver. RCP Detection Zones RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 to 2 mph (1 km/h to 3 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately 10 mph (16 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can Modes Of Operationbe obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the Three selectable modes of operation are available in thesensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer tosystem will not be able to alert the driver. “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/PersonalWhen RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Under-driver is alerted using both the visual and audible standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. 3alarms, including reducing the radio volume. Blind Spot Alert WARNING! When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be view mirror based on a detected object. However, when used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a the system is operating in RCP, the system will respond parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when with both visual and audible alerts when a detected backing up, even when using RCP. Always check object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and the radio is muted. be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back- ing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
    • 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEBlind Spot Alert Lights/Chime When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object isWhen operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode, present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radiothe BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro- is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; thepriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the RCP state always requests the chime.turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to analert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime Blind Spot Alert Offwill also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and de- When the BSM system is turned off there will be notected object are present on the same side at the same visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCPtime, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In systems.addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also bemuted. NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicleNOTE: is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM used. system, the radio is also muted. Astronomy Zone — System Temporarily Unavailable• If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request When the vehicle enters this zone the blind spot system the appropriate visual alert only. will become temporarily unavailable and the EVIC will
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143display the message “ Blind spot system unavailable- For Uconnect௡ customer support, visit www.Uconnect-Astronomy zone”. The side mirrors LED’s will be lit up Phone.com or call 1–877–855–8400.and stay lit until the vehicle exits the zone. Uconnect௡ Phone allows you to transfer calls between theUconnectா Phone — IF EQUIPPED system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphoneUconnect௡ Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- for private conversation. 3vehicle communications system. Uconnect௡ Phone al-lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile The Uconnect௡ Phone is driven through your Bluetooth௡phone using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect௡ features“Mike” ѧ “Work” or “Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your Bluetooth௡ technology - the global standard that enablesmobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehi- different electronic devices to connect to each othercle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute without wires or a docking station, so Uconnect௡ Phoneyour radio when using the Uconnect௡ Phone. works no matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phoneNOTE: The Uconnect௡ Phone requires a mobile phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’sequipped with the Bluetooth௡ “Hands-Free Profile”, Ver- Uconnect௡ Phone. The Uconnect௡ Phone allows up tosion 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect௡ website for sup- seven mobile phones to be linked to the system. Only oneported phones.
    • 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLElinked (or paired) mobile phone can be used with the access the system. When you press the button you willsystem at a time. The system is available in English, hear the word Uconnect௡ followed by a BEEP. The beepSpanish, or French languages. is your signal to give a command. Voice Command Button WARNING! Actual button location may vary with the ra- Any voice commanded system should be used only dio. The individual buttons are described in the in safe driving conditions following all applicable “Operation” section. laws, including laws regarding phone use. All atten- tion should be focused on safely operating the ve- The Uconnect௡ Phone can be used with any Hands-Free hicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision Profile certified Bluetooth௡ mobile phone. See the causing serious injury or death. Uconnect௡ website for supported phones. Refer to your mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer forUconnect௡ Phone Button details. The radio or steering wheel controls (if The Uconnect௡ Phone is fully integrated with the vehi- equipped) will contain the two control buttons cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect௡ Phone (Uconnect௡ Phone button and Voice Com- can be adjusted either from the radio volume control mand button) that will enable you to knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right switch), if so equipped.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145The radio display will be used for visual prompts from • For each feature explanation in this section, only thethe Uconnect௡ Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on compound form of the voice command is given. Youcertain radios. can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it. ForOperation example, you can use the compound form voice com-Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect௡ mand “Phonebook New Entry”, or you can break the 3Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect௡ Phone compound form command into two voice commands:menu structure. Voice commands are required after most “Phonebook” and “New Entry”. Please remember, theUconnect௡ Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a Uconnect௡ Phone works best when you talk in aspecific command and then guided through the available normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someoneoptions. sitting a few feet/meters away from you.• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the Voice Command Tree beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or another Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section. prompt. Help Command• For certain operations, compound commands can be used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to “Pair a Device”, the following compound command know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following can be said: “Pair a Bluetooth௡ Device”. the beep. The Uconnect௡ Phone will play some of the options at any prompt if you ask for help.
    • 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLETo activate the Uconnect௡ Phone, simply press the The following are general phone to Uconnect௡ Phone button and follow the audible prompts for directions. pairing instructions:Uconnect௡ Phone sessions begin with a press of the • Press the button to begin. button on the radio control head. • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, sayCancel Command “Device Pairing”.At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” andyou will be returned to the main menu. However, in a • When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device”few instances the system will take you back to the and follow the audible prompts.previous menu. • You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identi-Pair (Link) Uconnect௡ Phone To A Mobile Phone fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to enter into your mobile phone. You can enter anyTo begin using your Uconnect௡ Phone, you must pair four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PINyour compatible Bluetooth௡ enabled mobile phone. after the initial pairing process.To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference • For identification purposes, you will be prompted toyour mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The Uconnect௡ web- give the Uconnect௡ Phone a name for your mobilesite may also provide detailed instructions for pairing. phone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147• You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a • The system will prompt you to say the number you priority level between one and seven, with one being want to call. the highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile • For example, you can say “234-567-8901”. phones to your Uconnect௡ Phone. However, at any given time, only one mobile phone can be in use, • The Uconnect௡ Phone will confirm the phone number connected to your Uconnect௡ System. The priority and then dial. The number will appear in the display 3 allows the Uconnect௡ Phone to know which mobile of certain radios. phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the Call By Saying A Name vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the • Press the button to begin. Uconnect௡ Phone will use the priority three mobile • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say phone when you make a call. You can select to use a “Call”. lower priority mobile phone at any time (refer to “Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this section). • The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call.Dial By Saying A Number • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say• Press the button to begin. the name of the person you want to call. For example,• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say you can say “John Doe”, where John Doe is a previ- “Dial”. ously stored name entry in the Uconnect௡ phonebook
    • 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a • When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g., name in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names to Your “Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or “Other”). This will Uconnect௡ Phonebook”, in the phonebook. allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone- book entry, if desired.• The Uconnect௡ system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number, which may • When prompted, recite the phone number for the appear in the display of certain radios. phonebook entry that you are adding.Add Names To Your Uconnect௡ Phonebook After you are finished adding an entry into the phone- book, you will be given the opportunity to add moreNOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect௡ Phonebook is phone numbers to the current entry or to return to therecommended when the vehicle is not in motion. main menu.• Press the button to begin. The Uconnect௡ Phone will allow you to enter up to 32• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say names in the phonebook with each name having up to “Phonebook New Entry”. four associated phone numbers and designations. Each language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of only in that language. In addition, if equipped and long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom- supported by your phone, Uconnect௡ Phone automati- mended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert” cally downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook. instead of “Bob”.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook • A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down-Transfer From Mobile Phone loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect௡ Phone.If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,Uconnect௡ Phone automatically downloads names (text • Depending on the maximum number of entries down-names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s loaded, there may be a short delay before the latestphonebook. Specific Bluetooth௡ Phones with Phone Book downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail- 3Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect௡ able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail-website for supported phones. able for use.• To call a name from the Uconnect௡ Phonebook or • Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call phone is accessible. by Saying a Name” section. • Either the mobile phone’s phonebook or the mobile• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins phone’s SIM card phonebook is downloaded. as soon as the Bluetooth௡ wireless phone connection is • This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or made to the Uconnect௡ Phone, for example, after you start the vehicle. deleted on the Uconnect௡ Phone. These can only be edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans- ferred and updated to Uconnect௡ Phone on the next phone connection.
    • 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEEdit Uconnect௡ Phonebook Entries After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry inNOTE: the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return• Editing names in the phonebook is recommended to the main menu. when the vehicle is not in motion. “Phonebook Edit Entry” can be used to add another• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be phone number to a name entry that already exists in the deleted or edited. phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number, but you can add “John• Press the button to begin. Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say Entry” feature. “Phonebook Edit Entry”. Delete Uconnect௡ Phonebook Entry• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended entry that you wish to edit. when the vehicle is not in motion.• Next, choose the number designation (home, work, • Press the button to begin. mobile, or other) that you wish to edit. • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the “Phonebook Delete”. phonebook entry that you are editing.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect௡ Phonebook Entries then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish • Press the button to begin. to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook “Phonebook Erase All”. from which you choose. To select one of the entries 3 • The Uconnect௡ Phone will ask you to verify that you from the list, press the button while the wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook. Uconnect௡ Phone is playing the desired entry and say “Delete”. • After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be deleted.• After you enter the name, the Uconnect௡ Phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete: home, • Note that only the phonebook in the current language work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you is deleted. wish to delete. • Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current deleted or edited. language is deleted. List All Names In The Uconnect௡ Phonebook• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be • Press the button to begin. deleted or edited.
    • 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service “Phonebook List Names”. plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect௡ Phone. Check with your• The Uconnect௡ Phone will play the names of all the mobile service provider for the features that you have. phonebook entries, including the downloaded phone- book entries, if available. Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call Currently In Progress• To call one of the names in the list, press the but- ton during the playing of the desired name, and say When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the “Call”. Uconnect௡ Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the call.NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete” Press the button to accept the call. To reject the call,operations at this point. press and hold the button until you hear a single beep,• The Uconnect௡ Phone will then prompt you as to the indicating that the incoming call was rejected. number designation you wish to call. Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call• The selected number will be dialed. Currently In ProgressPhone Call Features If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call, you will hear the same network tones forThe following features can be accessed through the call waiting that you normally hear when using yourUconnect௡ Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153mobile phone. Press the button to place the current Place/Retrieve A Call From Holdcall on hold and answer the incoming call. To put a call on hold, press the button until you hearNOTE: The Uconnect௡ Phone compatible phones in the a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. Tomarket today do not support rejecting an incoming call bring the call back from hold, press and hold the but-when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can ton until you hear a single beep.only answer an incoming call or ignore it. 3 Toggling Between CallsMaking A Second Call While Current Call Is In If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),Progress press the button until you hear a single beep, indicat-To make a second call while you are currently on a call, ing that the active and hold status of the two calls havepress the button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to Conference Callcall. The first call will be on hold while the second call isin progress. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling When two calls are in progress (one active and one onBetween Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer hold), press and hold the button until you hear ato “Conference Call” in this section. double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call.
    • 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEThree-Way Calling RedialTo initiate three-way calling, press the button while • Press the button to begin.a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, saydescribed under “Making a Second Call While Current “Redial”.Call is in Progress”. After the second call has established,press and hold the button until you hear a double • The Uconnect௡ Phone will call the last number thatbeep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into was dialed from your mobile phone.one conference call. NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from theCall Termination Uconnect௡ Phone.To end a call in progress, momentarily press the but- Call Continuationton. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on theis a call on hold, it will become the new active call. If the Uconnect௡ Phone after the vehicle ignition has beenactive call is terminated by the phone far end, a call on switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail-hold may not become active automatically. This is cell able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, pressand hold the button until you hear a single beep. • After the ignition is switched to OFF, a call can continue on the Uconnect௡ Phone either until the call
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates • Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the cessation of the call on the Uconnect௡ Phone and language selection. transfer of the call to the mobile phone. After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and• After the ignition is cycled to OFF, a call can continue voice commands will be in that language. on the Uconnect௡ Phone for a certain duration, after NOTE: After every Uconnect௡ Phone language change 3 which the call is automatically transferred from the operation, only the language-specific 32-name phone- Uconnect௡ Phone to the mobile phone. book is usable. The paired phone name is not language-• An active call is automatically transferred to the specific and is usable across all languages. mobile phone after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Emergency AssistanceUconnectா Phone Features If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone isLanguage Selection reachable:To change the language that the Uconnect௡ Phone is using: • Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency• Press the button to begin. number for your area.• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say the name of the language you wish to switch to English, Espanol, or Francais.
    • 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEIf the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect௡ Phone is • The Uconnect௡ Phone does slightly lower your chancesoperational, you may reach the emergency number as of successfully making a phone call as to that for thefollows: mobile phone directly.• Press the button to begin. WARNING!• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say “Emergency” and the Uconnect௡ Phone will instruct the To use you Uconnect௡ Phone System in an emer- paired mobile phone to call the emergency number. This gency, your mobile phone must be: feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and Mexico. • turned on, • paired to the Uconnect௡ System,NOTE: • and have network coverage.• The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and Roadside Assistance Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed If you need roadside assistance: may not be applicable with the available mobile ser- • Press the button to begin. vice and area.• If supported, this number may be programmable on • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say some systems. To do this, press the button and say “Roadside Assistance”. “Setup”, followed by “Emergency”.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157NOTE: Voice Mail Calling• The roadside assistance number dialed is based on the To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-2069 with Automated Systems”. for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454 for Working With Automated Systems Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the “Roadside Assistance” This method is used in instances where one generally has 3 coverage details on the DVD in the Warranty Informa- to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while tion Booklet and the Roadside Assistance references. navigating through an automated telephone system.• If supported, this number may be programmable on You can use your Uconnect௡ Phone to access a voice mail some systems. To do this, press the button and say system or an automated service, such as a paging service “Setup”, followed by “Roadside Assistance”. or automated customer service line. Some services re- quire immediate response selection. In some instances,Paging that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect௡ Phone.To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated When calling a number with your Uconnect௡ Phone thatSystems”. Paging works properly except for pagers of normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequencecertain companies, which time out a little too soon to on your mobile phone keypad, you can press thework properly with the Uconnect௡ Phone.
    • 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE button and say the sequence you wish to enter, NOTE:followed by the word “Send”. For example, if required to • You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phoneenter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you network configurations. This is normal.can press the button and say, “3 7 4 6 # Send”.Saying a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by • Some paging and voice mail systems have system time“Send”, is also to be used for navigating through an out settings that are too short and may not allow theautomated customer service center menu structure, and use of this feature.to leave a number on a pager. Barge In — Overriding PromptsYou can also send stored Uconnect௡ phonebook entries as The “Voice Command” button can be used when youtones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voiceentries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to command immediately. For example, if a prompt iscall and then press the button and say, “Send.” The asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” yousystem will prompt you to enter the name or number and could press the button and say, “Pair a Phone” tosay the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send. select that option without having to listen to the rest ofThe Uconnect௡ Phone will then send the corresponding the voice prompt.phone number associated with the phonebook entry, astones over the phone.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF using Uconnect௡ Phone. The status is given for network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the systemfrom confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect௡ Phone Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypadwill not repeat a phone number before you dial it). You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone• Press the button to begin. keypad and still use the Uconnect௡ Phone (while dialing 3 via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say caution and take precautionary safety measures). By one of the following: dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth௡ mobile – “Setup Confirmation Prompts On” phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s – “Setup Confirmation Prompts Off” audio system. The Uconnect௡ Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using Voice Command.Phone And Network Status Indicators NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send theIf available on the radio and/or on a premium display dial ring to the Uconnect௡ Phone to play it on the vehiclesuch as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situa-your mobile phone, the Uconnect௡ Phone will provide tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feelnotification to inform you of your phone and network that the call did not go through even though the call is instatus when you are attempting to make a phone call progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the audio.
    • 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEMute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF) from your Uconnect௡ Phone paired mobile phone to the Uconnect௡ Phone or vice versa, press the button andWhen you mute the Uconnect௡ Phone, you will still beable to hear the conversation coming from the other say “Transfer Call”.party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In Connect Or Disconnect Link Between Theorder to mute the Uconnect௡ Phone: Uconnect௡ Phone And Mobile Phone• Press the button. Your mobile phone can be paired with many different electronic devices, but can only be actively “connected”• Following the beep, say “Mute”. with one electronic device at a time.In order to un-mute the Uconnect௡ Phone: If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth௡• Press the button. connection between your mobile phone and the Uconnect௡ Phone System, follow the instructions de-• Following the beep, say “Mute off”. scribed in your mobile phone User’s Manual.Advanced Phone Connectivity List Paired Mobile Phone NamesTransfer Call To And From Mobile Phone • Press the button to begin.The Uconnect௡ Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans-ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect௡ Phone • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, saywithout terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call “Setup Phone Pairing”.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161• When prompted, say “List Phones”. • The selected phone will be used for the next phone call. If the selected phone is not available, the• The Uconnect௡ Phone will play the phone names of all Uconnect௡ Phone will return to using the highest paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the priority phone present in or near (approximately lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle. being announced, press the button and say “Se- lect” or “Delete”. Also, see the next two sections for an Delete Uconnect௡ Phone Paired Mobile Phones 3 alternate way to “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone. • Press the button to begin.Select Another Mobile Phone • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, sayThis feature allows you to select and start using another “Setup Phone Pairing”.phone paired with the Uconnect௡ Phone. • At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the• Press the button to begin. prompts.• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • You can also press the button at any time while the “Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts. list is being played, and then choose the phone you wish to delete.• You can also press the button at any time while the list is being played, and then choose the phone that you wish to select.
    • 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEThings You Should Know About Your Uconnectா • Press the button and say the “Voice Training”,Phone “System Training”, or “Start Voice Training” com- mand.Uconnect௡ Phone TutorialTo hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the You can either press the Uconnect௡ Phone button to restore the factory setting or repeat the words and phrases when button and say “Uconnect௡ Tutorial.” prompted by the Uconnect௡ Phone. For best results, theVoice Training Voice Training session should be completed when theFor users experiencing difficulty with the system recog- vehicle is parked with the engine running, all windowsnizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect௡ closed, and the blower fan switched off.Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this This procedure may be repeated with a new user. Thetraining mode, follow one of the two following proce- system will adapt to the last trained voice only.dures: ResetFrom outside the Uconnect௡ Phone mode (e.g., fromradio mode): • Press the button.• Press and hold the button for five seconds until • After the “Ready” prompt, and the following beep, say the session begins, or, “Setup”, then “Reset”.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries, • low road noise,and other settings in all language modes. The System will • smooth road surface,prompt you before resetting to factory settings. • fully closed windows,Voice Command • dry weather condition.• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to • Even though the system is designed for users speaking 3 provide at least ½ in (1 cm) gap between the overhead in North American English, French, and Spanish ac- console (if equipped) and the mirror. cents, the system may not always work for some.• Always wait for the beep before speaking. • When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send”. speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from you. • Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended.• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a Voice Command period. • It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the Uconnect௡ Phonebook.• Performance is maximized under: • low-to-medium blower setting, • low-to-medium vehicle speed,
    • 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect௡ Phone Local) • smooth road surface, name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are • fully closed windows, not similar. • dry weather conditions, and• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must • operation from the driver’s seat. be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”. • Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero). to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not the Uconnect௡ Phone.• Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing • Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced number combinations may not be supported. by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be • In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down. compromised with the convertible top down.Far End Audio Performance Recent Calls• Audio quality is maximized under: If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Down- • low-to-medium blower setting, load”, Uconnect௡ Phone can list your Outgoing, Incom- • low-to-medium vehicle speed, ing and Missed Calls. • low road noise,
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165SMS Send Messages:Uconnect௡ Phone can read or send new messages on You can send messages using Uconnect௡ Phone. To sendyour phone. a new message:Read Messages: • Press the button.If you receive a new text message while your phone is • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say 3connected to Uconnect௡ Phone, an announcement will be “SMS Send” or “Send Message.”made to notify you that you have a new text message. If • You can either say the message you wish to send or sayyou wish to hear the new message: “List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.• Press the button. To send a message, press the button while the• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say system is listing the message and say “Send.” “SMS Read” or “Read Messages.” Uconnect௡ Phone will prompt you to say the name or• Uconnect௡ Phone will play the new text message for number of the person you wish to send the message to. you.After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward”the message using Uconnect௡ Phone.
    • 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEList of Preset Messages: 11. See You in 15 minutes1. Yes 12. I am on my way2. No 13. I’ll be late3. Where are you? 14. Are you there yet?4. I need more direction. 15. Where are we meeting?5. L O L 16. Can this wait?6. Why 17. Bye for now7. I love you 18. When can we meet?8. Call me 19. Send number to call9. Call me later 20. Start without me10. Thanks
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF Bluetooth௡ Communication LinkTurning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to thethe system from announcing the new incoming mes- Uconnect௡ Phone. When this happens, the connectionsages. can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in• Press the button. Bluetooth௡ ON mode. 3• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say Power-Up “Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement,” you will then be given a choice to change it. After switching the ignition from OFF to either the ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you must wait at least fifteen seconds prior to using the system.
    • 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 3
    • 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate (s) Primary Alternate (s) zero all one call two cancel 3 three confirmation prompts four continue five delete six dial seven download eight edit nine emergency star (*) English plus (+) erase all pound (#) Espanoladd location Francais
    • 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate (s) Primary Alternate (s) help previous home record again language redial list names return to main menu return or main menu list phones select phone select mobile send mute set up phone settings or phone mute off set up new entry towing assistance no transfer call other Uconnect௡ Tutorial pair a phone voice training phone pairing pairing work phonebook phone book yes
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173General Information VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPEDThis device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and Voice Command System OperationRSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to thefollowing conditions: The Uconnect௡ Voice Command system allows• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by you to control your AM, FM radio, disk player, 3 the party responsible for compliance could void the USB mass storage class device, iPOD family of user’s authority to operate the equipment. devices, Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device, satellite radio, disc player, and a memo recorder.• This device may not cause harmful interference. NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface Sys-• This device must accept any interference received, tem as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the including interference that may cause undesired op- Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands eration. may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level.
    • 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Pressing the Voice Command button while the WARNING! system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system Any voice commanded system should be used only will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or in safe driving conditions following all applicable change commands. This will become helpful once you laws. All attention should be focused on safely start to learn the options. operating the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”, collision causing serious injury or death. “Help” or “Main Menu”.When you press the Voice Command button, you These commands are universal and can be used from anywill hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a menu. All other commands can be used depending uponcommand. the active application.NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few When using this system, you should speak clearly and atseconds, the system will present you with a list of a normal speaking volume.options. The system will best recognize your speech if the win-If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan isoptions, press the Voice Command button, listen for set to low.the beep, and say your command. At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice Com- Main Menumand button and say “Help” or “Main Menu”. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice CommandCommands button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the main menu.The Voice Command system understands two types ofcommands. Universal commands are available at all In this mode, you can say the following commands: 3times. Local commands are available if the supported • “Radio AM” (to switch to the radio AM mode)radio mode is active. • “Radio FM” (to switch to radio FM mode)Changing the Volume • “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command button. • “USB” (to switch to USB mode)2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”). • “Bluetooth Streaming” (to switch to Bluetooth௡ Streaming mode)3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Com- • “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder) mand system is speaking. Please note the volume • “System Setup” (to switch to system setup) setting for Voice Command is different than the audio system.
    • 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLERadio AM • “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)this mode, you may say the following commands: Satellite Radio• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency) To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite• “Next Station” (to select the next station) Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com- mands:• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station) • “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu) spoken number)• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu) • “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)Radio FM • “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. Inthis mode, you may say the following commands: • “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency) • “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)• “Next Station” (to select the next station) • “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station) • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177Disc Mode – “Continue” (to continue recording)To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you – “Delete” (to delete the recording)may say the following commands: • “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) —• “Track” (#) (to change the track) During the playback you may press the Voice Com- mand button to stop playing memos. You pro-• “Next Track” (to play the next track) ceed by saying one of the following commands: 3• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track) – “Repeat” (to repeat a memo) – “Next” (to play the next memo)• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu) – “Previous” (to play the previous memo)Memo Mode – “Delete” (to delete a memo)To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In • “Delete All” (to delete all memos)this mode, you may say the following commands: Setup• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the recording, you may press the Voice Command To switch to system setup, you may say one of the button to stop recording. You proceed by saying following: one of the following commands: • “Change to setup” – “Save” (to save the memo) • “Switch to system setup”
    • 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE• “Change to setup” Voice Training• “Main menu setup” or For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog- nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect௡• “Switch to setup” Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.In this mode, you may say the following commands: 1. Press the Voice Command button, say “System• “Language English” Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice Training.” This will train your own voice to the system• “Language French” and will improve recognition.• “Language Spanish” 2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by• “Tutorial” Uconnect௡ Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training” session should be completed when the vehicle is• “Voice Training” parked, engine running, all windows closed, and theNOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice blower fan switched off. This procedure may be re-Command button first and wait for the beep before peated with a new user. The system will adapt to thespeaking the “Barge In” commands. last trained voice only.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179SEATS Power Seats — If EquippedSeats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the Some models may be equipped with eight-way power seatsvehicle. for the driver and front passenger. The power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the seat. The switches WARNING! control the movement of the seat cushion and the seatback. 3 • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Driver Power Seat Switch 1 — Seat Switch 2 — Seatback Switch
    • 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! CAUTION!• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Do not place any article under a power seat or impede Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat control which could cause a collision and serious controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement injury or death. is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. seat belt. Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch shoulder belt is no longer resting against your when the desired position has been reached. chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181Tilting The Seat Up Or Down WARNING!The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in fourdirections. Pull upward or push downward on the front • Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat Moving a seat while driving could result in loss ofcushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release control which could cause a collision and seriousthe switch when the desired position has been reached. injury or death. 3 • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seatReclining The Seatback belts and while the vehicle is parked. SeriousThe angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or injury or death could result from a poorly adjustedrearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward, seat belt.the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release • Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that thethe switch when the desired position is reached. shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
    • 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.Power Lumbar — If EquippedVehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seatsmay be also be equipped with power lumbar. The powerlumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the Power Lumbar Switchpower seat. Push the switch forward to increase thelumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease Heated Seats — If Equippedthe lumbar support. On some models, the front and rear seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start WARNING! On models that are equipped with remote start, the• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin driver’s heated seat can be programmed to come on because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting Sys- spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus- tem — If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting tion or other physical condition must exercise care Your Vehicle” for further information. 3 when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for Front Heated Seats long periods of time. There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that and passenger to operate the seats independently. The insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. controls for each heater are located on the switch bank This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting below the climate controls. in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface tempera- You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings. ture of the seat. Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
    • 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Press the switch once to select HIGH-level Rear Heated Seats heating. Press the switch a second time to select On some models, the second row seats are equipped with LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third heaters. There are two heated seat switches that allow the time to shut the heating elements OFF. second row passengers to operate the seats indepen-NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt dently. The heated seat switches are located on the slidingwithin two to five minutes. side door handle trim panels.When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater willprovide a boosted heat level during the initial stages ofoperation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normalHIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected, thesystem will automatically switch to LOW-level afterapproximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. Atthat time, the display will change from HIGH to LOW,indicating the change. The LOW-level setting will turnOFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes. Second Row Heated Seat Switch
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings. Manual Front/Second Row Seat AdjusterAmber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward. Theheat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seatHIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF. cushion at the front edge of each seat. Press the switch once to select HIGH-level heating. Press the switch a second time to select 3 LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF.NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be feltwithin two to five minutes.When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater willprovide a boosted heat level during the initial stages ofoperation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normalHIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected, thesystem will automatically switch to LOW-level afterapproximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At Manual Seat Adjusterthat time, the display will change from HIGH to LOW,indicating the change. The LOW-level setting will turnOFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
    • 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEWhile sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide Manual Reclining Seats — If Equippedthe seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you For models equipped with manual reclining seats, thehave reached the desired position. Then, using body recline lever is located on the outboard side of the seat.pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to besure that the seat adjusters have latched. WARNING! • Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death. • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. Manual Recline Lever To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, then push back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and WARNING!rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched. The head restraints for all occupants must be prop- WARNING! erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu- pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad- Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a 3 vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, or removed could cause serious injury or death in the which could result in serious injury or death. event of a collision.Head Restraints Active Head Restraints — Front SeatsHead restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable compo-by restricting head movement in the event of a rear nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readilyimpact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top identified by any markings, only through visual inspec-of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear. tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
    • 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEWhen AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front halfof the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gapbetween the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.This system is designed to help prevent or reduce theextent of injuries to the driver and front passenger incertain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Re-straints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve-hicle” for further informationTo raise the head restraint, pull upward on the headrestraint. To lower the head restraint, press the pushbutton, located at the base of the head restraint, and pushdownward on the head restraint. Push Button For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to move the head restraint away from your head.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 3Active Head Restraint (Normal Position) Active Head Restraint (Tilted) NOTE: • The head restraints should only be removed by quali- fied technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the head restraints require removal, see your autho- rized dealer.
    • 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Re- WARNING! (Continued) straint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things To Know Before • Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Ac- WARNING! tive Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Re- • Do not place items over the top of the Active Head straint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable warning could cause personal injury if the Active DVD players. These items may interfere with the Head Restraint is deployed. operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or Head Restraints — Second Row Quad Seats death. To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push (Continued) button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 Head Restraints — Third Row The head restraint in the center position can be raised and lowered for tether routing. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. 3 Stow ’n Goா Seating — If Equipped On vehicles equipped with Stow ’n Go௡ seating, the second and third row seats can be folded into the floor for convenient storage. Second Row Stow ’n Go௡ Push Button On vehicles equipped with Stow ’n Go௡ seats, the seatsHead Restraints — Second Row Bench will fold and tumble in one motion.To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head 1. Move the front seat fully forward.restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the pushbutton, located at the base of the head restraint, and push 2. Recline the front seatback fully forward.downward on the head restraint. 3. Raise the armrests on the second row seat.
    • 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLENOTE: Seat will not stow in the storage bin unless the 5. Pull upward on the seatback recliner lever located onarmrests are raised. the outboard side of the seat.4. Slide the storage bin locking mechanism to the “LOCK” position and then pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover. Seatback Recliner Lever, Seat Tumble, And Head Restraint Fold Lever The non-adjustable head restraint and seatback will fold automatically during the seat tumble. No additional Storage Bin Cover Lock Release actuation is necessary.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 3Non-Adjustable Head Restraint Automatic Folding Seatback
    • 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEThe seat will automatically tumble into position for easystorage. Seat In Storage Bin 7. Close the storage bin cover. Tumbled Second Row Seat6. Push the seat into the storage bin.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 To Unstow Second Row Seats CAUTION! 1. Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover.The storage bin cover must be locked and flat toavoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks, 2. Pull up on the strap to lift the seat out of the storagewhich have minimal clearance to the cover. bin and push the seat rearward to latch the seat anchors. 3 WARNING! 3. Lift the seatback to the full upright position.In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat 4. Return the head restraint to its upright position, closestorage bin covers are not properly latched. the storage bin cover and slide the storage bin locking• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers mechanism to the “Unlocked” position. open. Stow ’n Go௡ Seat — Folded And Latched Position• Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched while the vehicle is in motion. To tumble or stow the seat from the folded and latched• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down. position: return the seatback and head restraint to the upright position. Then pull up on the seatback recliner lever on the outboard side of the seat to fold head rest and seatback and tumble seat forward.
    • 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE1. Return the seatback to the upright position. Raising The Head Restraint Raising The Seatback 3. Pull up on the seatback recliner lever on the outboard2. Return the head restraint to the upright position. side of the seat to fold head rest and seatback and tumble seat forward.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197Easy Entry Second Row The seat will automatically fold into position for easyThe second row Stow ’n Go௡ seats allow easy entry to the entry into the third row.third row seat or rear cargo area. WARNING!Pull up on the seatback recliner lever on the outboardside of the seat. In the event of a collision you could be injured if the seat is not fully latched. 3 Seatback Recliner Lever, Seat Tumble, And Head Restraint Fold Lever
    • 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEQuad Seats — If Equipped While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slideBoth Quad seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once youmanual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat have reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to becushion at the front edge of each seat. sure that the seat adjusters have latched. WARNING! • Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death. • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. Manual Seat Adjuster
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199Manual Recline WARNING!To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, then pushback to the desired position and release the lever. Lean Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that theforward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched. which could result in serious injury or death. 3 Recline Lever
    • 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEFold-Flat Easy EntryTo fold the seat, lift the recliner lever to the full upward The Quad seats can be tilted forward for easy entry intoposition and push the seatback forward until it rests on the third row. With the Quad seat in the fold-flat position,the seat cushion. lift up on the easy entry lever located near the bottom of the seat and lift the seat forward. Fold-Flat Quad Seat Easy Entry Lever
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201For passengers seated in the third row, there is a pull Removalstrap located on the outboard side of the seat near the The Quad seats can be removed if additional storage isbottom of the seat back. Third row passengers can pull on needed. With the seat in the easy entry position, lift thethe strap and push the Quad seat forward for folding the cross beam forward and up to release the front anchorseatback and accessing the easy entry lever. latches. 3 Pull Strap for Third Row Passengers Cross Beam For Seat Removal
    • 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLESecond Row Bench Seat — If Equipped indicator button pops up when the seat is unlocked. The seat assembly can now be removed from the vehicle andWhile the bench seat does not stow in the floor, it is moved on its Easy Out௡ Rollers.removable for added cargo space. Release Handles Second Row Bench Seat To reinstall the seat, align the seat into the detent posi-Release levers are located on the rear leg assemblies, near tions on the floor. Squeeze the release handle and rotatethe floor. To remove the seat, squeeze each release handle upward until the lock indicator button returns into theand rotate downwards to deploy the wheels. A lock handle.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203 WARNING! If not properly latched, the bench seats could become loose. Personal injuries could result. After reinstall- ing these seats, be sure the red indicator button on the release handles return into the handles. 3Third Row Power Recline — If EquippedThe power recline feature, located on the side of the seatcushion, adjusts the seatback angle forward/rearwardfor occupant comfort. Third Row Power Seat Switch Third Row Power Folding Seat — If Equipped A one-touch power folding seat switch is located in the left rear trim panel as part of a switch bank.
    • 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLENOTE: Lower the head restraint by pulling on therelease strap marked “1” located on the outboard side ofthe head restraint. One Touch Folding Seat Third Row The rear switch bank allows multiple power folding and unfolding positions for the third row seats. Head Restraint Release Strap “1”The switch is only functional when the liftgate is openand the vehicle is in PARK.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205Left and right third row seats can be folded individually NOTE:or together. The third row power folding seat adjusts to • Disconnect the center shoulder belt from the smallthe following positions using the switch bank located on buckle and lower the head restraints before attemptingthe left rear trim panel: to fold/stow the power third row seats. • To abort seat operation while seat is in motion, press a 3 different seat position selector switch to stop the seat. Once the seat stops moving, then the desired position can be selected. • The third row power seat system includes obstacle detection for safe operation. When the system detects an obstacle, the motors will stop and reverse the motion a short distance to move the seat away from the obstacle. Should this occur, remove the obstacle and press the button again, for the desired position. Rear Panel Power Switch Bank1 — Open to Normal 2 — Stow3 — Tailgate/Fold Flat 4 — Right/Left Seats/Both Seats
    • 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEManually Folding Third Row Seats — If Equipped1. Lower the center head restraint down to the seatback by pushing the button on the guide and pushing the head restraint down.2. Lower the outboard head restraints by pulling on the release strap marked “1” located on the outboard side of the head restraint. Head Restraint Release Strap “1”
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2073. Pull release strap marked “2” located on the rear of the 4. Pull release strap marked “3” to release the anchors. seat to lower the seatback. 3 Release Strap “3” Release Strap “2”
    • 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE5. Pull release strap marked “4” and tumble the seat rearward into the storage bin. Stowed Third Row Seat To Unfold Third Row Seats Release Strap “4” 1. Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat out of the storage bin and push the seat forward until the anchors latch. 2. Pull release strap marked “2” to unlock the recliner.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2093. Pulling strap “4” releases the seatback to return to its WARNING! full upright position.4. Raise the head restraint to its upright position. To avoid serious injury or death, never operate the vehicle with occupants in the third row seat while in the tailgate mode. WARNING! 3 In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully handles are built into the seatbacks of all rear seats and latched. some front seats. The floor supports the partial weight of the bagged goods.Tailgate Mode1. Pull release strap “3”, then pull release strap “4” to rotate the entire seat rearward.2. To restore the seat to its upright position, lift up on the seatback and push forward until the anchors latch.
    • 210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEDRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may have been delivered with two RKEThe Memory Buttons 1 and 2 on the driver’s door panel transmitters. Only one RKE transmitter can be linked tocan be programmed to recall the driver’s seat, outside each of the memory positions.mirrors, adjustable brake and accelerator pedals, and Setting Memory Positions And Linking RKEradio station preset settings. Your Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory(RKE) transmitters can also be programmed to recall thesame positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed. NOTE: Each time the SET (S) button and a numbered button (1 or 2) is pressed, you erase the memory settings for that button and store a new one. 1. Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Press the driver door MEMORY button number 1 if you are setting the memory for driver 1, or button number 2 if you are setting the memory for driver 2. The system will recall any stored settings. Wait for the system to complete the memory recall before continu- ing to Step 3. Driver Memory Switch
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2113. Adjust the driver’s seat, recliner, and driver’s side- 10. Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to view mirror to the desired positions. the ON position.4. Adjust the brake and accelerator pedals to the desired 11. Select “Remote Linked to Memory” in the Electronic positions. Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and enter “Yes”. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center5. Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets 3 (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Un- (up to 10 AM and 10 FM stations can be set). derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-6. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and formation. remove the key. 12. Repeat the above steps to set the next Memory7. Press and release the SET (S) button located on the position using the other numbered Memory button driver’s door. or to link another RKE transmitter to memory.8. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY Memory Position Recall button 1 or 2 on the driver’s door. The next step must NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory be performed within 5 seconds if you desire to also use positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not a RKE transmitter to recall memory positions. in PARK, a message will be displayed in the EVIC.9. Press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE transmitters.
    • 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLETo recall the memory settings for driver one, press 2. Press and release MEMORY button 1. The system willMEMORY button 1 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCK recall any memory settings stored in position 1. Waitbutton on the RKE transmitter linked to memory posi- for the system to complete the memory recall beforetion 1. continuing to Step 3.To recall the memory setting for driver two, press 3. Press and release the memory SET (S) button locatedMEMORY button 2 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCK on the driver’s door. A chime will sound signaling thatbutton on the RKE transmitter linked to Memory Posi- you are in the memory set mode.tion 2. 4. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORYA recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the MEMORY button 1 on the driver’s door. A chime will soundbuttons on the driver’s door during a recall (S, 1, or 2). signaling to you that the driver memory has been set.When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat, driver’s mirror, 5. Within five seconds, press and release the UNLOCKand the pedals stop moving. A delay of one second will button on the RKE transmitter. A chime will soundoccur before another recall can be selected. signaling to you that the RKE transmitter link has beenTo Disable RKE Transmitter Linked To Memory successfully disabled.1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and To disable another RKE transmitter linked to either remove the key. Memory Position, repeat Steps 1 to 5 for each RKE transmitter.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213NOTE: Once programmed, all RKE transmitters linked to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seatto memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time. will return to its previously set position when youRefer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/ insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it out ofCustomer-Programmable FeaturesЉ in “Understanding the LOCK position.Your Instrument Panel” for further information. • When you remove the key from the ignition switch theEasy Entry/Exit Seat driver seat will move to a position 0.3 in (7.7 mm) 3(Available With Memory Seat ONLY) forward of the rear stop if the driver seat position is between 0.9 – 2.7 in (22.7 – 67.7 mm) forward of theThis feature provides automatic driver seat positioning toenhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set position when you insert the key into the ignitionvehicle. switch and turn it out of the LOCK position.The distance the driver seat moves depends on whereyou have the driver seat positioned when you remove the • The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when thekey from the ignition switch. driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no• When you remove the key from the ignition switch, benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit the driver seat will move about 2.4 in (60 mm) rear- or Easy Entry. ward if the driver seat position is greater than or equal
    • 214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEEach stored memory setting will have an associated Easy TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOODEntry and Easy Exit Position. To open the hood, two latches must be released.NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be enabled 1. Pull the hood release lever located on the instrumentor disabled through the programmable features in the panel, below the steering column.Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). If yourvehicle is not equipped with an EVIC, your dealershipcan activate/deactivate this feature for you. For details,refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “UnderstandingYour Instrument Panel” for further information. Hood Release Lever
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2152. Move to the front of the vehicle and look inside the Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open center of the hood opening. Locate, then push the position. safety catch downward while raising the hood at the same time. 3 Hood Prop Rod Safety Lever Location
    • 216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE LIGHTS CAUTION! Headlight SwitchTo prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to The headlight switch is located on the left side of theclose it. Lower the hood until it is open approxi- instrument panel. The switch controls the operation ofmately 12 in (30 cm) and then drop it. This should the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights,secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless interior lights and the fog lights.the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged. WARNING!Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving yourvehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could openwhen the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.Failure to follow this warning could result in seriousinjury or death. Headlight Switch With Halo Control
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent Headlights On With Wipers — If Equippedfor parking light and instrument panel light operation. When your headlights are in the AUTO mode and theRotate the headlight switch to the second detent for engine is running, the headlights will automatically turnheadlight, parking light and instrument panel operation. on when the wiper system is also turned on. HeadlightsAutomatic Headlights — If Equipped on when windshield wipers are on may be found on vehicles equipped with an automatic headlight system. 3This system automatically turns your headlights on or off Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/based on ambient light levels. To turn the system on, turn Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understandingthe headlight switch to the extreme counterclockwise Your Instrument Panel” for further information.position aligning the indicator with the AUTO on theheadlight switch. When the system is on, the Headlight Headlight Delay — If EquippedTime Delay feature is also on. This means your headlights This feature provides the safety of headlight illuminationwill stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the for up to 90 seconds after exiting your vehicle.ignition switch OFF. To turn the Automatic System off,turn the headlight switch clockwise to the O (OFF) To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switchposition. while the headlights are still on. Then turn off the headlights within 45 seconds. The 90 second delay inter-NOTE: The engine must be running before the head- val begins when headlight switch is turned off. If thelights will come on in the Automatic mode. headlights or parking lights are turned back on or the ignition switch is turned ON, the delay will be cancelled.
    • 218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEWhen exiting the vehicle the driver can choose to have Lights-On Reminderthe headlights remain on for 30, 60 or 90 seconds or not If the headlights or the parking lights are left on, or if theremain on. To change the timer setting, see your autho- dimmer control is in the extreme top position after therized dealer. ignition switch is turned OFF, a chime will sound whenThe headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles the driver’s door is opened.equipped with an EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Daytime Running Lights — If EquippedInformation Center (EVIC)/Customer-ProgrammableFeatures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when thefurther information. engine is started and the transmission is in any gear except PARK. This provides a constant lights on condi-If the headlights are turned off before the ignition, they tion until the ignition is turned OFF. The lights illuminatewill turn off in the normal manner. at less than 50% of normal intensity. If the parking brakeNOTE: The headlights must be turned off within is applied, the Daytime Running Lights (DRL) will turn45 seconds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this off. Also, if a turn signal is activated, the DRL lamp on thefeature. same side of the vehicle will turn off for the duration of the turn signal activation. Once the turn signal is no longer active, the DRL lamp will illuminate.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219Front Fog Lights — If Equipped To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and push in theheadlight switch control knob. Pressing the headlightswitch control knob in a second time will turn the frontfog lights off. 3Dimmer ControlsThe dimmer switch is located next to the headlightswitch. Dimmer Control With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights.
    • 220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEInterior Lighting On NOTE: The key must be out of the ignition switch or theRotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the ignition switch must be in the OFF position for thissecond detent (extreme top position) to turn on the feature to operate.interior lights. The interior lights will remain on when the Interior Lighting Offdimmer control is in this position. Rotate the left dimmer control to the off position (extremeInterior lights are also turned on when a door or liftgate bottom). The interior lights will remain off when theis opened, the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is doors or liftgate are open.activated, or when the dimmer control is moved to the Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)extreme top. Rotate the left dimmer control to the first detent. ThisThe interior lights will automatically turn off in approxi- feature brightens the odometer, radio and overheadmately 10 minutes for the first activation and 90 seconds displays when the parking lights or headlights are on.every activation thereafter until the engine is started, ifone of the following occur: Halo Lights — If Equipped• A door, sliding door or the liftgate is left open Halo lights are strategically placed soft lighting that help to illuminate specific areas to aid the occupants in• Any overhead reading light is left on locating specific features while driving at night.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221The Halo control switch is located to the right of the Multifunction Leverdimmer switch. The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column. 3 Halo Control To activate the Halo lights, rotate the Halo Multifunction Lever switch control upward or downward to in- crease or decrease the lighting.
    • 222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEThe multifunction lever controls the: Turn Signal Warning• Turn Signals If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has traveled at over 18 mph (29 km/h) for about 1 mile• Headlight Beams Low/High (1.6 km) with the turn signals on, a chime will sound to• Flash-To-Pass (Optical Horn) alert the driver.• Front and Rear Wipers — Washer Functions Lane Change AssistTurn Signals Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flashMove the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows three times then automatically turn off.on each side of the instrument cluster flash to showproper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. High/Low Beam SwitchNOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or When the headlights are turned on, pushing the multi-there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside function lever toward the instrument panel will switchlight bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is from low beams to high beams. Pulling back to themoved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is neutral position returns the headlights to the low beamdefective. operation.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223Flash-To-Pass WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERSYou can signal another vehicle with your headlights by The wipers and washers are operated by a switch withinlightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This the multifunction lever. Rotate the end of the multifunc-will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and tion lever to select the desired wiper speed.remain on until the lever is released. 3Battery ProtectionThis feature provides battery protection to avoid wearingdown the battery if the headlights, parking lights, orfront fog lights are left on for extended periods of timewhen the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. Aftereight minutes of the ignition switch being in the LOCKposition and the headlight switch in any position otherthan OFF or AUTO, the lights will turn off automaticallyuntil the next cycle of the ignition switch or headlightswitch.The battery protection feature will be disabled if the Washer And Wiper Controlsignition switch is turned to any other position other thanLOCK during the eight minute delay.
    • 224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLENOTE: Always remove any buildup of snow that pre- Intermittent Wiper Systemvents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditionsoff position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be-and the blades cannot return to the off position, damage tween cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunc-to the wiper motor may occur. tion lever to the first detent position, and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There WARNING! are five delay settings, which allow you to regulate the Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second could lead to a collision. You might not see other to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when the windshield during freezing weather, warm the the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less. windshield with the defroster before and during Windshield Wiper Operation windshield washer use. Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation. Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper opera- tion.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225Windshield Washers Rear Wiper And WasherTo use the Washer, push on the end of the lever to the Rotating the rotary ring to the first detent activates thesecond detent and hold while spray is desired. If the lever rear intermittent wipers. To activate the washers, rotateis pushed while on the intermittent setting, the wipers the rotary ring fully forward and the washers will spraywill turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after the until the ring is released, and then resume the intermit-lever is released, and then resume the intermittent inter- tent interval. 3val previously selected. If the lever is pushed while the NOTE: Rear window wipers function in the intermittentwipers are in the off position, the wipers will operate wiper speed only.several wipe cycles, then turn off. Rain Sensing Wipers — If EquippedMist Feature This feature senses moisture on the windshield andPress the end of the multifunction lever inward (toward automatically activates the wipers for the driver. Thisthe steering column) to the first detent and release for a feature is especially useful for road splash or overspraysingle wiping cycle. from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. RotateNOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer the end of the multifunction lever to one of the fivepump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the intermittent wiper sensitivity settings to activate thiswindshield. The wash function must be used in order to feature.spray the windshield with washer fluid.
    • 226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEThe sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the • The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and offmultifunction lever. Wiper sensitivity position 3 has been through the EVIC (if equipped). Refer to “Electroniccalibrated for best overall wiping sensitivity. If the opera- Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settingstor desires more wiping sensitivity, they may select (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understand-sensitivity positions 4 or 5. If the operator desires less ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.wiping sensitivity, they may select sensitivity positions 2 The Rain Sensing system has protective features for theor 1. Place the multifunction lever in the OFF position wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under thewhen not using the system. following conditions:NOTE: • Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the feature will not operate when the ignition is first wiper speed is in the low or high position. switched ON, and the vehicle is stationary, and the outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless the• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, or when ice or dried saltwater is present on the the vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph windshield. (0 km/h), or the outside temperature rises above• Use of Rain-X௡ or products containing wax or silicone freezing. may reduce rain sensor performance.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227• Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature will TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN not operate when the ignition is ON, and the transmis- This feature allows you to tilt the steering column sion shift lever is in the NEUTRAL position, and the upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h), unless the shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved or located below the steering wheel at the end of the the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position. steering column. 3• Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist. Tilt/Telescoping Lever
    • 228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLETo unlock the steering column, push the lever downward HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED(toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the The steering wheel contains a heating element that helpssteering wheel upward or downward as desired. To warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steeringlengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heatedwheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering wheel has been turned on it will operate forsteering column in position, push the lever upward until approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automaticallyfully engaged. shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already WARNING! warm. Do not adjust the steering column while driving. The heated steering wheel switch is located on the switch Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv- bank below the climate controls. ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to Press the switch to turn on the heated follow this warning may result in serious injury or steering wheel. The light on the switch death. will illuminate to indicate the steering wheel heater is on. Pressing the switch a second time will turn off the heated steering wheel and light indicator.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated WARNING! (Continued)steering wheel to operate. • Do not place anything on the steering wheel thatVehicles Equipped With Remote Start insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steeringOn models that are equipped with remote start, the wheel covers of any type and material. This mayheated steering wheel can be programmed to come on cause the steering wheel heater to overheat. 3during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting Sys-tem — If Equipped” in “Things to Know Before Starting ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPEDYour Vehicle” for further information. The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a WARNING! greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position. This feature allows the brake, accelerator, • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin and clutch pedals (if equipped) to move toward or away because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, from the driver to provide improved position with the spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus- steering wheel. tion, or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods. (Continued)
    • 230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEThe switch is located on the left side of the steering Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearwardcolumn. (toward the driver). • The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF. • The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control Sys- tem is on. The following messages will be displayed on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Informa- tion System (EVIC) if the pedals are attempted to be adjusted when the system is locked out (“Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or “Ad- justable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”. NOTE: Adjustable Pedal Switch • Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full pedal travel.Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward(toward the front of the vehicle). • Further small adjustments may be necessary to find the best possible seat/pedal position.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231 The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the CAUTION! right side of the steering wheel. Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move, as it may cause damage to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become lim- ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the 3 adjustable pedal’s path. WARNING! Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving. You could lose control and have an accident. Always adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED Electronic Speed Control ButtonsWhen engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over 1 — ON/OFF 2 — RES +accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph 4 — CANCEL 3 — SET -(40 km/h).
    • 232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLENOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec- WARNING!tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shutdown if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system onthe same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentallySystem can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired You could lose control and have an accident. Alwaysvehicle set speed. leave the system OFF when you are not using it.To Activate To Set A Desired SpeedPush the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehiclethe instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) buttonoff, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle willIndicator Light will turn off. The system should be operate at the selected speed.turned off when not in use. NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET button. To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control iserasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continuallybutton or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue tospeed memory. decrease until the button is released. Release the button when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speedTo Resume Speed will be established. 3To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mphbutton and release. Resume can be used at any speed (1.6 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap ofabove 20 mph (32 km/h). the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).To Vary The Speed Setting To Accelerate For PassingWhen the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in- Press the accelerator as you would normally. When thecrease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.is continually pressed, the set speed will continue toincrease until the button is released, then the new set Using Electronic Speed Control On Hillsspeed will be established. The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain thePressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph vehicle set speed.(1.6 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap ofthe button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
    • 234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLENOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains PARKSENSEா REAR PARK ASSIST —speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on IF EQUIPPEDmoderate hills is normal. The ParkSense௡ Rear Park Assist system provides visualOn steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so and audible indications of the distance between the rearit may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.Control. during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense௡ System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and WARNING! recommendations. Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the ParkSense௡ will retain the last system state (enabled or system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve- disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you changed to the ON/RUN position. could lose control and have an accident. Do not use ParkSense௡ can be active only when the shift lever is in Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads REVERSE. If ParkSense௡ is enabled at this shift lever that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery. position, the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 11 mph (18 km/h) or above. The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h).
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235ParkSenseா Sensors The ParkSense௡ Warning Display is located in the Instru- ment cluster’s EVIC display. It provides both visual andThe four ParkSense௡ sensors, located in the rear fascia/ audible warnings to indicate the distance between thebumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detectobstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal 3direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-tion of the obstacle.ParkSenseா Warning DisplayThe ParkSense௡ Warning screen will only be displayed ifSound and Display is selected from the Customer- Pro-grammable Features section of the Electronic VehicleInformation Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic VehicleInformation Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-strument Panel” for further information. ParkSense௡ Warning Display
    • 236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEParkSenseா DisplayWhen the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning displaywill turn ON indicating the system status. Park Assist System OFF Park Assist System ON
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showingthree solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone.As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVICdisplay will show fewer arcs and the sound tone willchange from slow, to fast, to continuous. 3 Fast Tone Slow Tone
    • 238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle: Continuous Tone
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239 WARNING ALERTS Rear Distance Greater than 79-39 in 39-25 in 25-12 in Less than (in/cm) 79 in (200 cm) (200-100 cm) (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) 12 in (30 cm) Audible Alert None Single Slow Fast Continuous Chime 1/2 Second Tone 3 Arcs None 3 Solid 3 Slow 2 Slow 1 Slow (Continuous) Flashing Flashing Flashing Radio Mute No Yes Yes Yes YesNOTE: ParkSense௡ will MUTE the radio, if on, when the When ParkSense௡ is disabled, the instrument cluster willsystem is sounding an audio tone. display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message forEnabling/Disabling ParkSenseா approximately five seconds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding YourParkSense௡ can be enabled and disabled through the Instrument Panel” for further information. When theCustomer-Programmable Features section of the EVIC. shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system isThe available choices are: OFF, Sound Only, or Sound andDisplay. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center disabled, the EVIC will display the “PARK ASSIST SYS-(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Fea- TEM OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is intures)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for REVERSE.further information.
    • 240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEService The ParkSenseா Rear Park Assist System If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” appears in the EVIC, see an authorized dealer.When the ParkSense௡ Rear Park Assist System is mal-functioning, the instrument cluster will actuate a single Cleaning The ParkSenseா Systemchime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the Clean the ParkSense௡ sensors with water, car wash soap“CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” or the “SERVICE and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do notPARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message. Refer to “Electronic scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding age the sensors.Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Whenthe shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has ParkSenseா System Usage Precautionsdetected a faulted condition, the EVIC will display the NOTE:“PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as long as thevehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense • Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,will not operate. dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense௡ system operat- ing properly.If “CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” appears in theElectronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) make sure • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations couldthe outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/ affect the performance of ParkSense௡.bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or otherobstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the messagecontinues to appear, see an authorized dealer.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241• When you turn ParkSense௡ off, the instrument cluster obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide will display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF.” Further- a false indication that an obstacle is behind the more, once you turn ParkSense௡ off, it remains off fascia/bumper. until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition • Objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., key. must not be placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do 3 position and ParkSense௡ is turned off, the EVIC will so can result in the system misinterpreting a close display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as object as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed in the EVIC .• ParkSense௡, when on, will MUTE the radio when it is sounding a tone. • On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense௡ should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered• Clean the ParkSense௡ sensors regularly, taking care not or open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. A to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. an obstacle is behind the vehicle. Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly. The ParkSense௡ system might not detect an
    • 242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! WARNING!• ParkSense௡ is only a parking aid and it is unable to • Drivers must be careful when backing up even recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. when using the Rear Park Assist system. Always Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind detected at all. Obstacles located above or below you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, the sensors will not be detected when they are in other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before close proximity. backing up. You are responsible for safety and• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using must continue to pay attention to your surround- ParkSense௡ in order to be able to stop in time when ings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the death. driver looks over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense௡. (Continued)
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243 PARKVIEWா REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF WARNING! (Continued) EQUIPPED• Before using the Rear Park Assist system, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView௡ Rear hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the ve- Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen hicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be 3 vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia radio display much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia screen along with a caution note to “check entire sur- when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. roundings” across the top of the screen. After five sec- Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and onds this note will disappear. The ParkView௡ camera is hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is plate. behind the vehicle. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again.
    • 244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEWhen displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width that will help indicate the distance to the rear of theof the vehicle while a dashed center-line will indicate the vehicle. The following table shows the approximatecenter of the vehicle to assist with aligning to a hitch/ distances for each zone:receiver. The static grid lines will show separate zones Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm) Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m) Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245 WARNING! CAUTION!Drivers must be careful when backing up even when • To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView௡ should onlyusing the ParkView௡ Rear Back Up Camera. Always be used as a parking aid. The ParkView௡ camera ischeck carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to unable to view every obstacle or object in yourcheck for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob- drive path. 3structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are • To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must beresponsible for the safety of your surroundings and driven slowly when using ParkView௡ to be able tomust continue to pay attention while backing up. stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. mended that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when using ParkView௡. NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
    • 246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLETurning ParkViewா On Or Off — With OVERHEAD CONSOLESNavigation/Multimedia Radio Front Overhead Console1. Press the “menu” hard-key. Two versions of the overhead console are available. The2. Select “system setup” soft-key. base front overhead console model featured fixed incan- descent courtesy/reading lights, flip-down sunglass stor-3. Press the “camera setup” soft-key. age and conversation mirror. The premium front over-4. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting head console model features a LED focused light that the “enable rear camera in reverse” soft-key. illuminates the instrument panel cupholders, two swiv- eling LED lights, flip-down sunglass storage, conversa-5. Press the “save” soft-key. tion mirror, optional power sliding door switches and anTurning ParkViewா On Or Off — Without optional power liftgate switch.Navigation/Multimedia Radio NOTE: Premium sunroof console models include all of1. Press the “menu” hard-key. above except sunglass storage.2. Select “system setup” soft-key.3. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting “enable rear camera in reverse” soft-key.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247 Courtesy/Interior Lighting At the forward end of the console are two courtesy lights (standard dome light has two buttons). The lights turn on when a front door, a sliding door or the liftgate is opened. If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) the lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK 3 button on the RKE transmitter is pressed. The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Press in on each lens to turn these lights on while inside the vehicle. Press a second time to turn each light off. You may adjust the direction of these lights by pressing theOverhead Console outside ring, which is identified with four directional arrows (LED lamps only). The area around the instrument panel cupholders is also illuminated from a light in the overhead console (pre- mium console only). This light is turned on when the headlight switch is on, and will adjust in brightness when the dimmer control is rotated up or down.
    • 248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLESunglass Storage (Non-Sunroof Only) The door will slowly rotate to the full open position.At the front of the overhead console, a compartment isprovided for the storage of two pairs of sunglasses.From the closed position, press the door latch to open thecompartment. Full Open Position From this position, the door can be fully closed or, by rotating upward about 3/4 of the way and releasing, positioned for conversation mirror use. Over Door Latch
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249 Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights — If Equipped The overhead console has two sets of courtesy lights. The lights turn on when a front door, a sliding door or the liftgate is opened. If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) the lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter is 3 pressed. Conversation Mirror PositionNOTE: From the “conversation mirror” position, thedoor can only be closed.To return to the full open position, the door must first beclosed and then opened by pressing the latch again torelease.
    • 250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEThe courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Press Rear Overhead Consoles — If Equippedin on each lens to turn these lights on while inside the The rear overhead storage system is available in twovehicle. Press the lens a second time to turn each light off. versions: with or without sunroof.You may adjust the direction of these lights by pressingthe outside ring, which is identified with four directional An additional LED at the front of the rear console shinesarrows. down on the front foot-well area while in courtesy mode, for added convenience. Reading Lights
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251 Rear Console Halo Lighting The rear overhead console has recessed halo lighting around the perimeter of the console base. This feature provides additional lighting options while traveling and is controlled by the headlight switch. Refer to “Lights/ Halo Lights — If Equipped” in “Understanding the 3 Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information. GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED HomeLink௡ replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers, motor- Overhead Compartment Features ized gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink௡ unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt1 — DVD* 5 — Storage battery.2 — Rear HVAC 6 — DVD*3 — Interior Lights 7 — Interior Lights4 — Storage 8 — Halo Lighting* If equipped, otherwise storage.
    • 252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEThe HomeLink௡ buttons, located on either the overheadconsole, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three differ-ent HomeLink௡ channels. The HomeLink௡ indicator islocated above the center button. HomeLink௡ Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner NOTE: HomeLink௡ is disabled when the Vehicle Secu- rity Alarm is active. Before You Begin Programming HomeLinkா HomeLink௡ Buttons/Overhead Consoles Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253For more efficient programming and accurate transmis- NOTE:sion of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that • Erasing all channels should only be performed whena new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of programming HomeLink௡ for the first time. Do notthe device that is being programmed to the HomeLink௡ erase channels when programming additional buttons.system.Erase all channels before you begin programming. To • If you have any problems, or require assistance, please 3 call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet aterase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUNposition and press and hold the two outside HomeLink௡ www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the redindicator flashes.
    • 254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEProgramming A Rolling CodeFor programming garage door openers that were manu-factured after 1995. These garage door openers can beidentified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button locatedwhere the hanging antenna is attached to the garage dooropener. It is NOT the button that is normally used toopen and close the door. The name and color of thebutton may vary by manufacturer. Training The Garage Door Opener 1 — Door Opener 2 — Training Button
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2551. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. Firmly press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN- ING” button. On some garage door openers/devices2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) there may be a light that blinks when the garage door away from the HomeLink௡ button you wish to program opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode. while keeping the HomeLink௡ indicator light in view. NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink௡ 3 step after the LEARN button has been pressed. button you want to program and the hand-held trans- mitter button. 6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink௡ button twice (holding the button for two4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi- seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device cator light. The HomeLink௡ indicator will flash slowly activates, programming is complete. and then rapidly after HomeLink௡ has received the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re- NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not acti- lease both buttons after the indicator light changes vate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to from slow to rapid. complete the training.5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), To program the remaining two HomeLink௡ buttons, locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is erase the channels. attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
    • 256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEProgramming A Non-Rolling Code 5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink௡ button and observe the indicator light.For programming Garage Door Openers manufacturedbefore 1995. • If the indicator light stays on constantly, program- ming is complete and the garage door/device should1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. activate when the HomeLink௡ button is pressed.2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) • To program the two remaining HomeLink௡ buttons, away from the HomeLink௡ button you wish to program repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT while keeping the HomeLink௡ indicator light in view. erase the channels.3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink௡ Reprogramming A Single HomeLinkா Button button you want to program and the hand-held trans- To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, mitter button. follow these steps:4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi- 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. cator light. The Homelink௡ indicator will flash slowly 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink௡ button until and then rapidly after HomeLink௡ has received the the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re- not release the button. lease both buttons after the indicator light changes 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- from slow to rapid. ming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257Canadian/Gate Operator Programming 3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink௡ button,For programming transmitters in Canada/United States while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-heldthat require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink௡ hasseveral seconds of transmission. successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi- cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly whenCanadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig- fully trained.nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans- 3mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink௡ 4. Watch for the HomeLink௡ indicator to change flashto pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may takeCanadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garagetime-out in the same manner. door may open and close while you are programming.It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling 5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink௡ buttonprocess to prevent possible overheating of the garage and observe the indicator light.door or gate motor. • If the indicator light stays on constantly, program- ming is complete and the garage door/device should1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. activate when the HomeLink௡ button is pressed.2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) • To program the two remaining HomeLink௡ buttons, away from the HomeLink௡ button you wish to program repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT while keeping the HomeLink௡ indicator light in view. erase the channels.
    • 258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEIf you unplugged the garage door opener/device for Using HomeLinkாprogramming, plug it back in at this time. To operate, press and release the programmedReprogramming A Single HomeLink௡ Button HomeLink௡ button. Activation will now occur for the programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate opera-To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, tor, security system, entry door lock, home/office light-follow these steps: ing, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. also be used at any time.2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink௡ button until Security the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn not release the button. in your vehicle.3. Without releasing the button proceed with To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for “Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all follow all remaining steps. channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be erased. The HomeLink௡ Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259Troubleshooting Tips WARNING!If you are having trouble programming HomeLink௡, here • Your motorized door or gate will open and closeare some of the most common solutions: while you are programming the universal trans-• Replace the battery in the original hand-held trans- ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, mitter. pets or other objects are in the path of the door or 3• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door to complete the training for a Rolling Code. opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal safety standards. This includes• Did you unplug the device for programming and most garage door opener models manufactured remember to plug it back in? after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener withoutIf you have any problems, or require assistance, please these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com forwww.HomeLink.com for information or assistance. safety information or assistance. • Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan- gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death. (Continued)
    • 260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEGeneral Information POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPEDThis device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry The power sunroof switch is located between the sunCanada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following visors on the overhead console.two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful interference.2. This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde- sired operation.NOTE:• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex- pressly approved by the party responsible for compli- ance could void the user’s authority to operate the device. Power Sunroof Switch• The term IC before the certification/registration num- ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci- fications were met.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261 Opening Sunroof — Express WARNING! Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half• Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in second and the sunroof will open automatically from any the ignition switch (or with the ignition in the position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automati- Accessory or Run position, for vehicles equipped cally. This is called “Express Open”. During Express with Keyless Enter-N-Go™). Occupants, particu- Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch 3 larly unattended children, can become entrapped will stop the sunroof. by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode serious injury or death. To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten opened condition until the switch is pushed and held your seat belt properly and make sure all passen- rearward again. gers are also properly secured.• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Closing Sunroof — Express Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any Press the switch forward and release it within one-half object, to project through the sunroof opening. second and the sunroof will close automatically from any Injury may result.
    • 262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEposition. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati- NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts resultcally. This is called “Express Close”. During Express in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will beClose operation, any movement of the switch will stop a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.the sunroof. Venting Sunroof — ExpressClosing Sunroof — Manual Mode Press and release the Vent button within one half secondTo close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This isforward position. Any release of the switch will stop the called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless ofmovement and the sunroof will remain in a partially sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, anyclosed condition until the switch is pushed and held movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.forward again. Sunshade OperationPinch Protect Feature The sunshade can be opened manually. However, theThis feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob- NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof isstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the open.sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward andrelease to Express Close.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263Wind Buffeting Ignition Off OperationWind buffeting can be described as the perception of For Vehicles Not Equipped With The Electronic Vehiclepressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the Information Center (EVIC)ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the The power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 secondswindows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur- Opening either front door will cancel this feature. 3rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs withthe rear windows open, open the front and rear windows For Vehicles Equipped With The EVICtogether to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs The power sunroof switch will remain active for up towith the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch isminimize the buffeting or open any window. turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front doorSunroof Maintenance will cancel this feature.Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean Sunroof Fully Closedthe glass panel. Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed.
    • 264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPEDTwo 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets are located on thelower instrument panel, below the open storage bin. Thedriver-side power outlet is controlled by the ignitionswitch and the passenger-side power outlet is connecteddirectly to the battery. The driver-side power outlet willalso operate a conventional cigar lighter unit (if equippedwith an optional Smoker’s Package). Instrument Panel Outlets NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR௡ cigar knob and element must be used.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265 CAUTION! • Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced. 3 • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Removable Console OutletOne outlet in the removable floor console (if equipped)shares a fuse with the lower outlet in the instrumentpanel and is also connected to the battery. Do not exceeda maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) sharedbetween the lower panel outlet and the removable floorconsole outlet.
    • 266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEOn vehicles equipped with the Super Console the power The outlet in the rear quarter panel near the liftgate andoutlets are located under the retractable cover. To access the upper outlet in the instrument panel are both con-the power outlets push down on the cover and slide it trolled by the ignition switch. Each of these outlets cantoward the instrument panel. support 160 Watts (13 Amps). Do not exceed 160 Watts (13 Amps) for each of these outlets. The power outlets include tethered caps, labeled with a key or battery symbol indicating the power source. The power outlet, located on the lower instrument panel, is powered directly from the battery. Items plugged into this power outlet may discharge the battery and/or prevent the engine from starting. Super Console Outlets
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267 WARNING! To avoid serious injury or death: • Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet. • Do not touch with wet hands. 3 • Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle. • If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure. Power Outlet Fuses1 — M7 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Center Seat (Opt) or withConsole Rear2 — M6 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel or withConsole Front3 — M36 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Instrument Panel orwith Console Center
    • 268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in only. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces- use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if sory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will power outlet can cause damage. discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting. POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, A 110 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet (if equipped) converts vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the DC current to AC current, and is located on the left rear battery even more quickly. Only use these intermit- trim panel immediately behind the second row left tently and with greater caution. passenger seat.• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery. (Continued)
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269 This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will most power tools. The power inverter is designed with built-in overload 3 protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter Power Inverter Outlet may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON.The power inverter switch is located on the instrument To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratingspanel below the climate controls. on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.To turn on the power outlet, press the switch once. Pressthe switch a second time to turn the power outlet off.
    • 270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLECUPHOLDERSThere are cupholders located throughout the interior. Allliners are removable for cleaning. Pull the flexible linerfrom the cupholder drawer or tray starting at one edgefor easy removal. Refer to “Cleaning The InstrumentPanel Cupholders” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” forfurther information.Instrument Panel CupholdersThe instrument panel cupholders are located in a pull-outdrawer just above the lower storage bin. Front Cupholders Pull the drawer out firmly until it stops, and place the container to be held in either one of the cupholder wells. The cupholders are designed to accommodate a wide variety of container types and sizes. Press down on the container to engage the cupholder retention features.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271Super Console — If Equipped For rear passengers two cupholders are located in theOn models equipped with the Super Console, there are pull-out drawer, located in the back of the Super Console.two cupholders located in the center of the console. Pull the drawer out to the first position to use the cupholders. 3 Super Console Cupholders Rear Cupholders
    • 272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEPremium Console Cupholders — If Equipped Interior Bottle HoldersOn models equipped with premium center consoles, There are four bottle holders located in the interior. Onethere are four cupholders located on the top of the bottle holder is molded into each front interior door trimconsole. panels, and one bottle holder is molded into each side sliding interior door trim panel. Each holder accommo- dates up to a 20 oz (.6 L) plastic bottle. WARNING! If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burn- ing the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors to avoid injury. Premium Console Cupholders
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273 Smoker’s Package Kit — If Equipped With the optional authorized dealer-installed Smoker’s Package Kit, a removable ash receiver is inserted into one of the two cupholders in the center front instrument panel. To install the ash receiver, align the receiver so the thumb grip on the lid is facing rearward. Press the ash 3 receiver into either of the cup wells to secure. Pull upward on the ash receiver to remove for cleaning and/or storage. The left rear trim panel cupholder is designed to accom- modate a second ash receiver, if desired. Interior Bottle HolderTwo outboard mesh pockets are on intermediate seating.The mesh pockets are flexible enough to hold juice boxes,toys, games or MP3 players, etc.
    • 274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLESTORAGE Upper Glove CompartmentGlove Compartments To open the upper compartment, press in on the button, located on the left side of the upper door. The door willUpper and lower glove compartments are located on the automatically open.passenger side of the instrument panel. Upper Compartment Upper and Lower Glove Compartments To close the compartment door, push downward on the door’s surface to latch the door closed.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275Lower Glove Compartment NOTE: The lower compartment is equipped with a lockTo open the lower compartment pull out on the release that is part of the compartment handle.handle. Door Trim Panel Storage Front Door Storage Both interior front door panels have multiple pockets for 3 storage. Lower Compartment
    • 276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEDriver Seatback Storage — If Equipped Umbrella HolderThe driver’s seatback has a primary storage pocket on all An umbrella holder has been conveniently molded intomodels and an optional secondary mesh pocket. the left front door entry scuff molding. Driver’s Seatback Storage Umbrella Holder1 — Bag Holder2 — Standard Pocket3 — Mesh Pocket
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277Second Row Seat Storage Bins — If EquippedThe seat storage bins are located on the floor in front ofthe second row seats. The area below the covers can beused for storage when the second row seat is in theupright position.Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover. Slide 3the storage bin locking mechanism to the ЉLockЉ positionto allow greater access to the storage bin. Storage Bin CAUTION! NOTE: The storage bin cover must be locked and flat to avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks, which have minimal clearance to the cover.
    • 278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat • Do not allow children to have access to the second storage bin covers are not properly latched. row seat storage bins. Once in the storage bin, • Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers young children may not be able to escape. If open. trapped in the storage bin, children can die from • Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched suffocation or heat stroke. while the vehicle is in motion. • In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat • Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down. storage bin covers are not properly latched. • Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin coversStorage Bin Safety Warning open. Keep the storage bin covers closed andCarefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal latched while the vehicle is in motion.injury or damage to your vehicle: • Do not operate the storage bin covers while the vehicle is in motion. • Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down. WARNING! • Always close the storage bin covers when your vehicle is unattended. (Continued)
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279 CAUTION! The storage bin cover must be flat and locked to avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks, which have minimal clearance to the cover. 3Seat Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release LeverAs a security measure, the Seat Storage Bin Cover has anEmergency Release Lever built into the latching mecha-nism. Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever NOTE: In the event of an individual being locked inside the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened from inside of the bin by pushing on the glow-in-the-dark lever attached to the storage bin cover latching mecha- nism.
    • 280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLECoat HooksCoat hooks are located along the headliner for the secondand third row seating positions. The coat hook load limitis 10 lbs (4.5 kg). Exceeding the recommended load limitcan cause the coat hooks to break or disengage from thevehicle.Cargo Area StorageThe liftgate sill plate has a raised line with the statement“Load To This Line”. This line indicates how far rearwardcargo can be placed without interfering with liftgateclosing. Rear Cargo Area Loading Limit NOTE: With all rear seats stowed or removed, 4 x 8 foot sheets of building material will fit on the vehicle floor with the liftgate closed. The front seats must be moved slightly forward of the rearmost position.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281CONSOLE FEATURES • Four cupholders accept up to extra large size beverage cups or 20 oz (.6 L) plastic bottles. Cupholders areThere are three consoles available: Basic, Premium and dishwasher safe for cleaning.Super. • The cupholders are removable to access a large storage WARNING! bin. 3 Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart- • The basic console is removable from the vehicle for ment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music additional floor space by removing the cap and clip at players, and other handheld electronic devices the console base. should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices To Remove The Basic Floor Console while driving can cause an accident due to distrac- tion, resulting in death or injury. 1. Remove the front anchor cup plug and clip. 2. Slide the console base forward while lifting slightly toBasic Console clear the rear load floor hook.Basic Console features consist of the following: 3. Remove the console.• The basic console profile allows vehicle occupants to easily pass through the first row to the second.
    • 282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLETo Reinstall The Basic Floor Console WARNING!1. Position the console at a slight angle (front slightly higher than the rear). In an accident, serious injury could result if the removable floor console is not properly installed.2. Slide the console rearward into the floor bracket/ Always be sure the removable floor console is fully hook. latched.3. Align the console until the front anchor cup plug hole Premium Console — If Equipped is centered on the winch hole. The three-compartment console with sliding storage bin,4. Reinstall the clip first and then while pushing down- sliding upper tray with storage and large console storage ward on the console with slight pressure, reinstall the bin offers multiple configurations. cover plug. • Four cupholders with dishwasher safe liners for clean-5. Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched. ing. The cupholders can accept plastic bottles, large cups or mugs with handles. • Top tray storage
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283• Upper storage bin can hold nine regular or 18 thin CDs Position 1 shows the console closed with four cupholders or other items and a convenient storage tray.• Large console center storage will store headphones for the available rear DVD entertainment system or other items 3• 12 Volt DC power outlet provides continuous power inside the console for cell phones or other electronics.• Rear occupant accessible• Multiple adjustments• Removable from vehicle for additional floor space.The top and center console sections slide forward andrearward to provide added user comfort. A one-piece cup Console Position 1holder insert for both cavities can easily be removed forcleaning. The cupholders will also accommodate largesize cups and 20 oz (.6 L) bottles.
    • 284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEPosition 2 shows the raised storage tray revealing a large Dual Storage Binsstorage area below. Position 3 shows the top portion of the console in a rearward position. This is accomplished by lifting the upper most latch at the front of the console. This provides easy access to the storage area below and provides two of the four cupholders for the second row passengers. Console Position 2 Console Position 3
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285Position 4 shows the complete console in its rearmost To Remove The Premium Floor Consoleposition. Again, lifting second latch handle at the front of 1. Pull up on the bottom release handle in the front of thethe console, allows complete access to a lower storage bin console.and provides additional cupholders for rear passengers. 2. Lift the rear of the console up several inches/ centimeters. 3 3. Pull rearward to disengage from floor and remove console. To Reinstall The Premium Floor Console: 1. Position the console at a slight angle (rear slightly higher than the front). 2. Slide the console forward into the floor bracket. 3. Rotate the rear of the console down until it is resting on the floor bracket. Console Position 4
    • 286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE4. Push down on the rear of the console until it is seated in the rear floor bracket.5. Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched. WARNING! In an accident, serious injury could result if the removable floor console is not properly installed. Always be sure the removable floor console is fully latched.Super Console — If Equipped Front Lower Pass ThroughThe Super Console contains multiple storage areas, front The super console tambour doors are opened by pushinglower pass through, top forward bin, top rearward bin down on the finger tabs and sliding the door. The frontand rear pull out drawer. tambour door slides forward, the rear tambour doorThe super console contains a pass through storage area slides rearward.accessible for both the driver and front passenger.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287 NOTE: The front cupholder light ring and pass through lighting is controlled by a dimming switch located on the instrument panel, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information. Located in the back of the super console is a storage drawer and cupholders for the rear passengers. 3 Super Console1 — Front Sliding Tambour Door2 — Cupholder Light Ring3 — Rear Sliding Tambour Door Rear Drawer Storage
    • 288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLECARGO AREA FEATURES Press in on the flashlight to release it.Rechargeable FlashlightThe rechargeable flashlight is mounted on the right sideof the cargo area. The flashlight snaps out of the bezelwhen needed. The flashlight features two bright LEDlight bulbs and is powered by a lithium battery thatrecharges when snapped back into place and the vehicleis either running or the key is in the accessory position. Press And Release
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289To operate the flashlight, press the switch once for high, REAR WINDOW FEATUREStwice for low, and a third time to return to off. Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control (Mode) knob. Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated 3 outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation, press the button a second time. NOTE: • You can turn off the heated mirror feature at anytime Three-Press Switch by pressing the rear window defroster switch a second time. • To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear win- dow defroster only when the engine is operating.
    • 290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED CAUTION! The automatic load leveling system will provide a level-Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loadingthe heating elements: conditions.• Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after to complete depending on road surface conditions. soaking with warm water. If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive 15 hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The window cleaners on the interior surface of the vehicle must be driven to reset the system. window.• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed within the roof rack side rails. If adding cargo, deploy the crossbars. Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291crossbars, to maximum of 150 lbs (68 kg). The roof rack The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry weightdoes not increase the total load carrying capacity of the on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load mustvehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be uniformlyplus that on the external rack does not exceed the distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.maximum vehicle load capacity. NOTE: 3 • Crossbars are error-proofed and cannot be deployed or stowed in the incorrect positions. • To help control wind noise, stow the crossbars in the side rails when they are not in use. Crossbar Stowed In Side Rail
    • 292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEDeploying the Crossbars CAUTION!To deploy the crossbars, completely loosen the thumbscrews at both ends of the crossbar and lift the crossbar Use care when removing and handling the crossbarsfrom its stowed position in the side rail. Repeat with to prevent damage to the vehicle.crossbar on the opposite side. Bend the crossbar supports at each end, taking care to keep hand clear of pivoting joint. Slide the thumb screw down. Loosening Crossbars
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 293 3Stowed Position Deployed Position Then, position the crossbars across the roof.
    • 294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLENOTE: The crossbars are identical and can be placed in Make sure the directional arrows on the crossbars alignany two of the three deploy positions. with the directional arrows on the side rails. Set the crossbars into the deployed positions. Deploy Positions – Choose Two Of Three Crossbar To Side Rail Installation
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 295Once the crossbars are set into position, tighten the Stowing the Crossbarsthumb screws completely. Reverse the procedure to stow the crossbars, again, taking care to keep hand clear of pivoting joint. Crossbars are identical and can be stowed in either rail nest. Once the crossbars are stowed, tighten the thumb screws completely. 3 Tightening Crossbar
    • 296 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLENOTE: Load should always be secured to crossbars first, CAUTION!with rail tie down loops used as additional securingpoints if needed. Tie loops are intended as supplemen- • Check deployed crossbars frequently and retightentary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting mecha- thumb screws as necessary.nisms with the tie loops. • To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately. • To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the crossbars deployed. • The load should be secured and placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on the roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the roof, place a blanket or other protective layer between the load and the roof surface. Rail Tie Loops (Continued)
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 297 SUN SCREENS — IF EQUIPPED CAUTION! (Continued)• Long loads which extend over the windshield, such Sun screens are available for second and third row as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large seating windows. The screens store in the sill trim panels, frontal area should be secured to both the front and and the tops of the windows are equipped with hooks rear of the vehicle. that the sun screens attach to when pulled out.• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully 3 when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load. This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle. WARNING!Cargo must be securely tied before driving yourvehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off thevehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per-sonal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack Sun Screen Retractedcautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
    • 298 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEGently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen.Continue pulling the sun screen until the tab is near thetop of the window.Once the screen is completely to the top of the window,extend the top bar of the sun screen over the two hooksattached to the top of the window. Sun Screen Extended To lower the sun screen, gently lift the tab upward to disengage the hooks, and feed the screen back into the base sill.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELCONTENTSⅥ INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .303 ▫ EVIC Red Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326Ⅵ INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE . . . . . . . . . .304 ▫ Oil Change Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329 4Ⅵ INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM . . . . . . .305 ▫ Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330Ⅵ INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .306 ▫ Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331Ⅵ ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION ▫ Trip Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331 CENTER (EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . .320 ▫ Tire PSI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332 ▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) ▫ Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332 Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 ▫ Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features) . . .332 ▫ EVIC White Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325 ▫ Messages # . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333 ▫ EVIC Amber Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
    • 300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ▫ Compass / Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . .333 Ⅵ UCONNECT௡ 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO . . .352 ▫ Customer-Programmable Features ▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode. . . . . . .352 (System Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 ▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE forⅥ Uconnect௡ 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/ CD and MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358 HDD/NAV — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342 ▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360 ▫ Operating Instructions ▫ LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) . . . . . . .363 (Voice Command System) — If Equipped. . . . .342 ▫ INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) . . . . . .363 ▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect௡ Phone) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .368 ▫ Uconnect௡ (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped. . . .364Ⅵ UCONNECT௡ 130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343 ▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect௡ Phone) — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368 ▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode. . . . . . .343 Ⅵ iPod௡/USB/MP3 CONTROL — ▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE For IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368 CD And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 ▫ Connecting The iPod௡ Or External USB ▫ Notes on Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369 ▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . .351
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301 ▫ Using This Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 ▫ Dual Video Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383 ▫ Controlling The iPod௡ Or External USB ▫ Play A DVD Using The Touch-Screen Radio . . .383 Device Using Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 ▫ Play A DVD Using The VES™ Player ▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371 (If Equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386 ▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 ▫ Listen To An Audio Source While A Video Is Playing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388 ▫ Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) . . . . . . . . .374 4 ▫ Third Row Swivel Screen (If Equipped) . . . . . .391Ⅵ UCONNECT௡ MULTIMEDIA — VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES)™ — ▫ Important Notes For Dual Video Screen If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391 ▫ Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 ▫ VES Remote Control – If Equipped . . . . . . . . .392 ▫ Blu-Ray Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 ▫ Remote Control Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395 ▫ Play Video Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378 ▫ Locking The Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .396 ▫ Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 ▫ Replacing The Remote Control Batteries. . . . . .396 While A Video Is Playing On Channel 1. . . . . .381 ▫ Headphones Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
    • 302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ▫ Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 ▫ Rear Manual Climate Control — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423 ▫ Replacing The Headphone Batteries. . . . . . . . .398 ▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — ▫ Unwired௡ Stereo Headphone Lifetime If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425 Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398 ▫ Summer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437Ⅵ STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414 ▫ Winter Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 ▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415 ▫ Vacation/Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 ▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415 ▫ Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438Ⅵ CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .416 ▫ Outside Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438Ⅵ RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE ▫ Operating Tips Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439 PHONES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416 ▫ A/C Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440Ⅵ CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417 ▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 41 — Air Vents 5 — Upper Glove Compartment 9 — Storage Bin 13 — Hood Release2 — Instrument Cluster 6 — Lower Glove Compartment 10 — Cup Holders 14 — Dimmer Switch3 — Shift Lever 7 — Climate Controls 11 — Switch Bank 15 — Headlight Switch4 — Radio 8 — DVD – If Equipped 12 — Ignition Switch
    • 304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELINSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM 4
    • 306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELINSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS If the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with1. Tachometer either turn signal on, a continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the signal off. If either indicator flashesThis gauge measures engine revolutions per minute at a rapid rate, check for a defective outside light bulb.(RPM x 1000). Before the pointer reaches the red area, 5. High Beam Indicatorease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage.2. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped This indicator shows that the high beam head- lights are on. Push the multifunction lever for- This indicator will illuminate when the front fog ward to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull lights are on. toward yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.3. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped 6. Odometer Display / Electronic Vehicle Information This indicator will illuminate when the park Center (EVIC) Display — If Equipped lights or headlights are turned on. Odometer Display / Trip Odometer Display The odom- eter display shows the total distance the vehicle has been4. Turn Signal Indicators driven. U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the when the turn signal lever is operated. correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair Message Display Areatechnician should leave the odometer reading the same When the appropriate conditions exist, the followingas it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so, odometer messages will display:then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker mustbe placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Ajarbefore the repair or service. It is a good idea for you tomake a record of the odometer reading before the repair/ gATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Liftgate Ajarservice, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or 4that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer LoW tirE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Tire Pressuremust be reset at zero.This also displays Trip A and Trip B, DTE, MPG or gASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Cap FaultL/100km, OAT (Outside Air Temperature) information toBase Cluster, use STEP and RESET button (on steering noFUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Faultwheel) to access or reset the display. CHAngE OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Change Required LoCOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Coolant
    • 308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELNOTE: Some of the above warnings will be displayed in noFUSEthe Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display Area If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the Igni-located in the instrument cluster. tion Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, orRefer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) damaged, a “noFUSE” message will display in the odom-Display — If Equipped” for further information. eter display area. For further information on fuses and fuse locations refer to “Fuses” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.LoW tirE CHAngE OILWhen the appropriate condition exists, the odometerdisplay will toggle between LoW and tirE for three Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil changecycles. indicator system. The CHAngE OIL message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximatelygASCAP 12 seconds, after a single chime has sounded, to indicateIf the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oilfiller cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a change indicator system is duty cycle-based, which“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer display means the engine oil change interval may fluctuatearea. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the dependent upon your personal driving style.STEP button on the steering wheel to turn off the Unless reset, this message will continue to display eachmessage. If the problem continues, the message will time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUNappear the next time the vehicle is started. position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309release the STEP button on the steering wheel. To reset 7. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Lightthe oil change indicator system (after performing the This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake Systemscheduled maintenance), perform the following steps. (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and(do not start the engine). may stay on for as long as four seconds.2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, itwithin 10 seconds. indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system 4 is not functioning and that service is required. However,3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position. the conventional brake system will continue to operateNOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.start the engine, the oil change indicator system did not If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be servicedreset. If necessary, repeat these steps. as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-LockElectronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when theDisplay — If Equipped ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, haveThe Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea- the light inspected by an authorized dealer.tures a driver-interactive display that is located in theinstrument cluster. For further information, refer to“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.
    • 310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL8. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If Equipped reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper inflated to the inflation pressure recommended tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation hasplacard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMShas tires of a different size than the size indicated on the low tire pressure telltale.vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMSdetermine the proper tire inflation pressure for those malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is nottires.) operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator isAs an added safety feature, your vehicle has been combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When theequipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when approximately one minute and then remain continuouslyone or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi- quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressureon a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a varietyoverheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the 9. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part ofTPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more an onboard diagnostic system, called OBD, thattires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the monitors engine and automatic transmission con-replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is into continue to function properly. the ON/RUN position, before engine start. If the bulb CAUTION! does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly. 4 The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, warning have been established for the tire size poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera- engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light tion or sensor damage may result when using re- stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. placement equipment that is not of the same size, In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause will not require towing. sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
    • 312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 10. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/ CAUTION! Malfunction Indicator Light — If EquippedProlonged driving with the MIL on could cause The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicatordamage to the engine control system. It also could Light” in the instrument cluster will come onaffect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is when the ignition switch is turned to theflashing, severe catalytic converter damage and ON/RUN position. It should go out with thepower loss will soon occur. Immediate service is engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction In-required. dicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC WARNING! system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several milesA malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), seeabove, can reach higher temperatures than in normal your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have theoperating conditions. This can cause a fire if you problem diagnosed and corrected.drive slowly or park over flammable substances such NOTE:as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could resultin death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Activation/others. Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC 13. Fuel Door Remindersystem will be ON, even if it was turned off previously. The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that theThe ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of thewhen it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop vehicle.when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that 14. Fuel Gaugecaused the ESC activation.11. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position. 4Light — If Equipped 15. Air Bag Warning Light This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con- trol (ESC) is off. This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on12. Speedometer during starting, stays on, or turns on whileIndicates vehicle speed. driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
    • 314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL16. Shift Lever Indicator 18. Brake Warning LightThe Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the This light monitors various brake functions,instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the including brake fluid level and parking brakeautomatic transmission. application. If the brake light turns on it mayNOTE: indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem withYou must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK. the anti-lock brake system reservoir.The highest available transmission gear is displayed in If the light remains on when the parking brake has beenthe lower right corner of the Electronic Vehicle Informa- disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on thetion Center (EVIC) whenever the Electronic Range Select master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake(ERS) feature is active. Use the +/- selector on the shift hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with thelever to activate ERS. Refer to “Automatic Transmission” Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brakein “Starting And Operating” for further information. System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.17. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped In this case, the light will remain on until the condition This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi- has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop. alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac- WARNING!ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulicsystem. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on isindicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could havedropped below a specified level. a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System 4NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp (ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Forcecornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi- Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, thetions. The vehicle should have service performed, and Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABSthe brake fluid level checked. Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces- Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checkedsary. by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
    • 316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELThe light also will turn on when the parking brake is 20. Temperature Gaugeapplied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi- The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-tion. ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates thatNOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-19. Seat Belt Reminder Light ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/ exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range. RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if CAUTION!the driver or front passenger’s seat belt is unbuckled, a Driving with a hot engine cooling system couldchime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge readsif the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicleReminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound. with the air conditioner turned off until the pointerRefer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know drops back into the normal range. If the pointerBefore Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call an autho- rized dealer for service.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317 briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on WARNING! while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). others could be badly burned by steam or boiling If the charging system light remains on, it means that the coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho- look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your rized dealer. Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph. If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting 4 Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.21. Low Fuel Light 23. Oil Pressure Warning Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0 gal This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The (7.8 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until light should turn on momentarily when the engine isfuel is added. started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the22. Charging System Light vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns on. This light shows the status of the electrical charg- ing system. The light should come on when the Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
    • 318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL24. Engine Temperature Warning Light 25. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light This light warns of an overheated engine condi- This light informs you of a problem with the tion. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. Thegauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a light will come on when the ignition is firstsingle chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. turned to ON/RUN and remain on briefly as aFurther overheating will cause the temperature gauge to bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting,pass H, a continuous chime will occur until the engine is have the system checked by an authorized dealer.allowed to cool. If a problem is detected, the light will come on while theIf the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when thestop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever isshift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve- placed in the PARK position, the light should turn off.hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to If the light remains lit with the engine running, yournormal, turn the engine off immediately and call for vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an autho-service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light isDo In Emergencies” for further information. flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 31926. Transmission Temperature Warning Light CAUTION! During sustained high speed driving or trailer towing up long grades on hot days, the auto- Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera- matic transmission oil may become too hot. ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause When the transmission overheat warning light severe transmission damage or transmission failure.turns on, you will experience reduced vehicle perfor-mance until the automatic transmission cools down. WARNING!Once the transmission has cooled down and the light 4 If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light isturns off, you may continue to drive normally. If the high illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle,speed is maintained, the overheating will continue to in some circumstances you could cause the fluid tooccur. boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaustIf the overheating continues, it may become necessary to components and cause a fire.stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle with thetransmission in NEUTRAL until the light turns off.
    • 320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER This system conveniently allows the driver to select a(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED variety of useful information by pressing the switchesThe Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea- mounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of thetures a driver-interactive display that is located in the following:instrument cluster. • Radio Information • Fuel Economy • Vehicle Speed • Trip Info • Tire PSI • Vehicle Info • Messages • Units • System Setup (Personal Settings) Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) • Turn Menu Off
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321The system allows the driver to select information by UP Buttonpressing the following buttons mounted on the steering Press and release the UP button to scroll up-wheel: ward through the main menus (Fuel Economy, Vehicle Info, Tire PSI, Cruise, Messages, Units, System Setup) and sub-menus. DOWN Button Press and release the DOWN button to scroll 4 downward through the main menus and sub-menus. SELECT Button The SELECT button allows access to informa- tion in EVIC submenus, selects some feature settings, and resets some EVIC features. The EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons EVIC prompts the driver when the SELECT button can be used by displaying the right arrow graphic.
    • 322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELBACK Button The main display area will normally display the main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main Press the BACK button to scroll back to a menu. The main display area also displays Љpop upЉ previous menu or sub-menu. messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn- ing or information messages. These pop up messages fallElectronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) into several categories:Displays • Five Second Stored MessagesThe EVIC display consists of three sections: When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of message takes control of the main display area for five1. The top line where compass direction, odometer line seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of and outside temperature are displayed. the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the2. The main display area where the menus and pop up condition that activated it remains active) and can be messages are displayed. reviewed from the ЉMessagesЉ main menu item. As long as there is a stored message, an ЉiЉ will be displayed in the3. The reconfigurable telltales section below the odom- EVIC’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this eter line. message type are ЉRight Front Turn Signal Lamp OutЉThe Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the and ЉLow Tire PressureЉ.white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in themiddle, and red telltales on the left.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323• Unstored Messages When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displaysThis message type is displayed indefinitely or until the the following messages:condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples • Key in ignitionof this message type are ЉTurn Signal OnЉ (if a turn signalis left on) and ЉLights OnЉ (if driver leaves the vehicle). • Ignition or Accessory On• Unstored Messages Until RUN • Remote start aborted — Door ajarThese messages deal primarily with the Remote Start • Remote start aborted — Hood ajar 4feature. This message type is displayed until the ignitionis in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are • Remote start aborted — L/Gate ajarЉRemote Start Aborted - Door AjarЉ and ЉPress BrakePedal and Push Button to StartЉ. • Remote start aborted — Fuel low• Five Second Unstored Messages • Remote start disabled — Start Vehicle to ResetWhen the appropriate conditions occur, this type of • Remote start active — Key to Runmessage takes control of the main display area for fiveseconds and then returns to the previous screen. Ex- • Wrong Keyamples of this message type are ЉMemory System Un- • Damaged Keyavailable - Not in ParkЉ and ЉAutomatic High Beams OnЉ. • Key not programmed
    • 324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL• Vehicle Not in Park • Left Front Turn Signal Light Out• Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start • Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out• Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime, if vehicle is in • Right Front Turn Signal Light Out motion) • Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out• Liftgate Ajar (chime will sound when vehicle starts • Park Assist Disabled moving) • Service Park Assist System• Low Tire Pressure • Personal Settings Not Available — Vehicle Not In Park• Service TPM System (refer to “Tire Pressure Monitor- ing System” in “Starting And Operating”) • Blind Spot System Off — This message is displayed when the ignition is turned to ON to indicate the Blind• Premium TPM Service Graphic Display Spot System has been turned off.• Turn Signal On • Blind Spot System Not Available — This message is• RKE Battery Low displayed to indicate the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is temporarily unavailable due to sensor block-• LOW WASHER FLUID age, electronic interference, or other ЉtemporaryЉ con-• Oil Change Required ditions. When this message is displayed both outside
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325 rear view icons will be illuminated. If electronic inter- Electronic Range Select (ERS) feature has been engaged ference is present, the BSM system will illuminate the and the gear selected is displayed. For further informa- icon only on the side of interference as long as inter- tion on ERS, refer to “Starting And Operating”. ference is present. • Electronic Speed Control Ready• Service Blind Spot System — This message is dis- This light will turn on when the electronic played to indicate the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) speed control is ready. For further information, system is permanently unavailable. The driver will refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under- receive an EVIC message and the BSM display warn- 4 standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.” ing in both mirrors will be permanently illuminated. If this message is present see an authorized dealer. • Electronic Speed Control SETEVIC White Telltale Lights This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is SET. For further information,This area will show reconfigurable white caution tell- refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under-tales. These telltales include: standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”• Electronic Range Select (ERS) StatusThe shift lever status “5,4,3,2,1” are displayed indicatingthe shift lever position. Telltales “5,4,3,2,1” indicate the
    • 326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELEVIC Amber Telltale Lights • Windshield Washer Fluid Low IndicatorThis area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell- This light will turn on to indicate the windshieldtales. These telltales include: washer fluid is low.• Low Fuel Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal EVIC Red Telltale Lights (11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. Thesefuel is added. telltales include:• Loose Gascap Indicator • Door Ajar If the vehicle diagnostic system determines This light will turn on to indicate that one or that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly more doors may be ajar. installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator will display in the telltale display area. Tighten • Oil Pressure Warning Lightthe fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT buttonto turn off the message. If the problem continues, the This light indicates low engine oil pressure. Themessage will appear the next time the vehicle is started. light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop theA loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chimemay also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). will sound for four minutes when this light turns on.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. • Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) LightThis light does not show how much oil is in the engine. This light informs you of a problem with theThe engine oil level must be checked under the hood. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The• Charging System Light light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb This light shows the status of the electrical charg- check. If the light does not come on during starting, have ing system. The light should come on when the the system checked by an authorized dealer.ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly 4as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while If a problem is detected, the light will come on while thedriving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when theelectrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever isthe charging system light remains on, it means that the placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging If the light remains lit with the engine running, yoursystem. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho- vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an autho-rized dealer. rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light isIf jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting flashing when the engine is running, immediate service isProcedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”. required. You may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing.
    • 328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL• Engine Temperature Warning Light • Transmission Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated engine condi- This light indicates that the transmission fluid tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap- temperature is running hot. This may occurproaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If thischime will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further light turns on, safely pull over and stop theoverheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H, vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL andthe indicator will continuously flash and a continuous run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool.If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and CAUTION!stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve- ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually causehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to severe transmission damage or transmission failure.normal, turn the engine off immediately and call forservice. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What ToDo In Emergencies” for more information.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329 Unless reset, this message will continue to display each WARNING! time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle, release the Menu button. To reset the oil change indicator in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to system (after performing the scheduled maintenance), boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust perform the following steps. components and cause a fire. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (do not start the engine.) 4Oil Change Required 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three timesYour vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change within 10 seconds.indicator system. The Oil Change Required message will 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds,after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when youscheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change start the engine, the oil change indicator system did notindicator system is duty-cycle based, which means the reset. If necessary, repeat these steps.engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent uponyour personal driving style.
    • 330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELFuel EconomyPress and release the UP or DOWN button until “FuelEconomy” displays highlighted in the EVIC and pressthe SELECT button. The following Fuel Economy func-tions display in the EVIC:• Average Fuel Economy (AVG)• Distance To Empty (DTE)• Miles Per Gallon (MPG)Average Fuel Economy Average Fuel Economy DisplayThis display shows the average fuel economy since the Distance To Empty (DTE)last reset. The Average Fuel Economy can be reset by This display shows the estimated distance that can befollowing the prompt in the EVIC to use the SELECT traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank. This esti-button. When the fuel economy is reset, the display will mated distance is determined by a weighted average ofread “zero” for two seconds. Then, the history informa- the instantaneous and average fuel economy, accordingtion will be erased, and the averaging will continue from to the current fuel tank level. DTE cannot be resetthe last fuel average reading before the reset. through the SELECT button.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle SELECT button. Press the SELECT button to display theloading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of current speed in mph or km/h. Pressing the SELECTthe vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value. button a second time will toggle the unit of measure between mph or km/h.When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change NOTE: Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicleto a “LOW FUEL” message. This display will continue Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in theuntil the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant EVIC.amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW 4 Trip InfoFUEL” message and a new DTE value will display. Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “TripMiles Per Gallon (MPG) Info” is highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECTThis display shows the instantaneous MPG in bar graph button. Press and release the UP/DOWN buttons toform while driving. This will monitor the gas mileage in highlight one of the following functions if you want toreal-time as you drive and can be used to modify driving reset it:habits in order to increase fuel economy. Trip AVehicle Speed Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the lastPress and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle reset.Speed” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the
    • 332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELTrip B UnitsShows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Units”reset. displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECTElapsed Time button. The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) can be changed between English and MetricShows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset units of measure. To make your selection, scroll up orwhen the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed down until the preferred setting is highlighted, thentime will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON press and release the SELECT button until a check-markor START position. appears next to the setting, showing that the setting hasTo Reset A Trip Function been selected.Reset will only occur while a resettable function is Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)selected (highlighted). Press and hold the SELECT button Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicleto clear the resettable function being displayed. Info” displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button.Tire PSI Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the selections below:Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “TirePSI:” displays highlighted in the EVIC. Press the SELECT • Coolant Tempbutton to view a graphic of the vehicle with a tire Displays the actual coolant temperature.pressure value at each corner of the graphic.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333• Oil Temperature Compass / Temperature DisplayDisplays the actual oil temperature. The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is facing. The EVIC will display one of eight compass• Oil Pressure readings and the outside temperature.Displays the actual oil pressure. NOTE: The system will display the last known outside• Engine Hours temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated tempera- 4Displays the number of hours of engine operation. ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect theMessages # displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readingsSelect from Main Menu using the UP or DOWN buttons. are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.This feature shows the number of stored warning mes- Automatic Compass Calibrationsages (in the # place holder). Pressing the SELECT button This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the needwill allow you to see what the stored messages are. Press to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new,and release the UP and DOWN buttons if there is more the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will displaythan one message to step through the remaining stored CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may also calibratemessages. Pressing the BACK button takes you back to the compass by completing one or more 360-degree turnsthe Main Menu.
    • 334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL(in an area free from large metal or metallic objects) until 3. Press the DOWN button until “Calibrate Compass” isthe CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The displayed in the EVIC.compass will now function normally. 4. Press and release the SELECT button to start theNOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and calibration. The “CAL” indicator will be displayed inan environment free from large metallic objects such as the EVIC.buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks, 5. Complete one or more 360-degree turns (in an areaetc. free from large metal or metallic objects) until theManual Compass Calibration “CAL” indicator turns off. The compass will now function normally.If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicatordoes not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the Compass Variancecompass into the Calibration Mode manually, as follows: Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North. To compensate for the1. Turn ON the ignition switch. differences the variance should be set for the zone where2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly (Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached, set, the compass will automatically compensate for the then press the SELECT button. differences, and provide the most accurate compass heading. For the most accurate compass performance, the compass must be set using the following steps.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of 1. Turn the ignition switch ON.the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones, 2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the SetupLaptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass (Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached,module is located, and it can cause interference with the then press the SELECT button.compass sensor, and it may give false readings. 3. Press the DOWN button until the “Compass Variance” message is displayed in the EVIC, then press the SELECT button. The last variance zone number dis- 4 plays in the EVIC. 4. Press and release the SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected, according to the map. 5. Press and release the RETURN button to exit. Customer-Programmable Features (System Setup) Personal Settings allows you to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK. If the transmission is Compass Variance Map out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving, a warning
    • 336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELmessage SYSTEM SETUP NOT AVAILABLE VEHICLE Nav–Turn By Turn–If EquippedNOT IN PARK displays when you try to select “System When this feature is selected, the navigation systemSetup” from the main menu. utilizes voice commands, guiding through the drivePress and release the UP or DOWN button until ЉSystem route, mile by mile, turn-by-turn until the final destina-SetupЉ is highlighted in the main menu of the EVIC. Then tion is reached. To make your selection, press and releasepress the SELECT button to enter the System Setup the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next tosub-menu. Press and release the UP or DOWN button to the feature showing the system has been activated or theselect a feature form the following choices: check-mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated.Select LanguageWhen in this display you may select one of five lan- Enable/Disable the Rear Park Assist System –guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip If Equippedfunctions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behindthe UP or DOWN button while in this display and scroll the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSEthrough the language choices. Press the SELECT button position and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mphto select English, Spanish (Español), French (Français). (18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only,Then, as you continue, the information will display in the Sound and Display, or turned OFF through the EVIC. Toselected language. make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337showing the system has been activated or the check-mark transmitter UNLOCK button twice, to unlock the passen-is removed showing the system has been deactivated. ger’s doors. When All Doors 1st Press is selected, all ofRefer to “Rear Park Assist System” in “Understanding the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKEThe Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,operating information. press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has beenAuto Unlock Doors – If Equipped activated or the check-mark is removed showing theWhen ON is selected, all doors will unlock when the system has been deactivated. 4vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or RKE Linked To Memory – If EquippedNEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. Tomake your selection, press and release the SELECT When this feature is selected the memory seat, mirror, andbutton until a check-mark appears next to the feature radio settings will return to the memory set position whenshowing the system has been activated or the check-mark the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is pressed. If thisis removed showing the system has been deactivated. feature is not selected then the memory seat, mirror, and radio settings can only return to the memory set positionRemote Unlock Sequence using the door mounted switch. To make your selection,When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s press and release the SELECT button until a check-markdoor will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless appears next to the feature showing the system has beenEntry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver activated or the check-mark is removed showing the sys-Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE tem has been deactivated.
    • 338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELRemote Start Comfort Sys. – If Equipped and release the SELECT button until a check-mark ap- pears next to the feature showing the system has beenWhen this feature is selected and the remote start is activated or the check-mark is removed showing theactivated, the heated steering wheel and driver heated system has been deactivated.seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather.In warm weather, the driver vented seat feature will Horn with Remote Startautomatically turn on when the remote start is activated. When this feature is selected, a short horn sound willThese features will stay on through the duration of occur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE START buttonremote start or until the key is turned to RUN. To make is pressed. To make your selection, press and release theyour selection, press and release the SELECT button until SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to thea check-mark appears next to the feature showing the feature showing the system has been activated or thesystem has been activated or the check-mark is removed check-mark is removed showing the system has beenshowing the system has been deactivated. deactivated.Horn with Remote Lock – If Equipped Flash Lamps with LockWhen this feature is selected, a short horn sound will When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals willoccur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with theThis feature may be selected with or without the Flash RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with orLamps with Lock feature. To make your selection, press without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339your selection, press and release the SELECT button until off if they were turned on by this feature. To make youra check-mark appears next to the feature showing the selection, press and release the SELECT button until asystem has been activated or the check-mark is removed check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that theshowing the system has been deactivated. setting has been selected.Headlamp Off Delay NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase theWhen this feature is selected, the driver can choose tohave the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The 4when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, scroll Features Of Your Vehicle.”up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted, Intermittent Wiper Options — If Equippedthen press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting When ON is selected, the system will automaticallyhas been selected. activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield. To make your selection, press and releaseHeadlamps with Wipers (Available with Auto the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next toHeadlights Only) the feature showing the system has been activated or theWhen ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in the check-mark is removed showing the system has beenAUTO position, the headlights will turn on approxi- deactivated. When the system is deactivated, the systemmately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The reverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation.headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned
    • 340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELKey-Off Power Delay highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showingWhen this feature is selected, the power window that the setting has been selected.switches, radio, Uconnect௡ phone (if equipped), DVDvideo system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), Flashers with Sliding Doorand power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes When this feature is selected the signal lamps activateafter the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either when power or manual sliding doors are in operation,front vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your signaling other drivers that someone may be exiting orselection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is entering the vehicle. To make your selection, press andhighlighted, then press and release the SELECT button release the SELECT button until a check-mark appearsuntil a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing next to the feature showing the system has been activatedthat the setting has been selected. or the check-mark is removed showing the system hasIlluminated Approach been deactivated.When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate Easy Entry/Exit Seat – If Equippedand remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning tounlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selec- enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting thetion, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341feature showing the system has been activated or the Blind Spot Alert – If Equippedcheck-mark is removed showing the system has been There are three selections when operating Blind Spotdeactivated. Alert (“Blind Spot Alert Lights”, “Blind Spot AlertNOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat Lights/CHM”, “Blind Spot Alert Off”). The Blind Spotlocation (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set Alert feature can be activated in “Blind Spot Alert Lights”to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the mode, when this mode is selected the Blind Spot Monitordoor. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding (BSM) system is activated and will only show a visualThe Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information. alert in the outside mirrors. The Blind Spot Alert feature 4 can be activated in “Blind Spot Alert Lights/CHM”Tilt Mirror In Reverse – If Equipped mode, in this mode the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) willWhen this feature is selected and the vehicle is placed in show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as ana reverse gear, the driver’s side mirror will tilt downward audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Blindto allow the driver to see into the previous blind spot and Spot Alert Off” is selected the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)avoid objects in close proximity to the rear of the vehicle. system is deactivated.To make your selection, press and release the SELECT To make your selection, press and release the SELECTbutton until a check-mark appears next to the feature button until a check-mark appears next to the featureshowing the system has been activated or the check-mark showing the system has been activated or the check-markis removed showing the system has been deactivated. is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
    • 342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELNOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in Uconnectா 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/NAV —the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is IF EQUIPPEDnot damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. Refer to your Uconnect௡ user’s manual for detailedTake your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor operating instructions.alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will resultin the BSM not operating to specification. Operating Instructions (Voice Command System) — If EquippedCalibrate Compass Refer to “Voice Command” for further details.Refer to “Compass Display” for more information. Operating Instructions (Uconnectா Phone) —Compass Variance If EquippedRefer to “Compass Display” for more information. Refer to “Uconnect௡ Phone” for further details.Turn Menu OffPress and release SELECT to turn the menu off.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343UCONNECTா 130 Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary) Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio. Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning 4 the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume, and to the left decreases it. When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played. Uconnect௡ 130 SEEK ButtonsOperating Instructions — Radio Mode Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the nextNOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switchposition to operate the radio. to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make
    • 344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELanother selection. Holding either button will bypass 5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.stations without stopping, until you release it. RW/FFTIME Button Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttonsPress the TIME button to alternate display of the time causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in theand radio frequency. direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies.Clock Setting Procedure TUNE Control1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink. Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. SCROLL control knob. Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS will begin to blink. will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/ SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL con- trol knob to save time change.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again totime and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL exit setting tone, balance, and fade.control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the AM/FM Buttonmid-range tones. Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a thirdtime and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbuttoncontrol knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Memorytreble tones. 4 When you are receiving a station that you wish toPush the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RNDtime and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the displaySCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock ontosound level from the right or left side speakers. this station and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing thePush the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time SET/RND button, the station will continue to play butand FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control will not be stored into pushbutton memory.knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level betweenthe front and rear speakers.
    • 346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELYou may add a second station to each pushbutton by Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD Andrepeating the above procedure with this exception: Press MP3 Audio Playthe SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the NOTE:display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 andSET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM • The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC positionand 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. to operate the radio.The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by • This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),pressing the pushbutton twice. recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compactEvery time a preset button is used, a corresponding discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks andbutton number will display. multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.Buttons 1 - 6 Inserting Compact Disc(s)These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CDto pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM stations). label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on theDISC Button radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more thanPressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from 1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must beAM/FM modes to Disc modes. ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio EJECT Button - Ejecting a CDON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.begin to play when you insert the disc. The display willshow the track number, and index time in minutes andseconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1. If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within CAUTION! 10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, • This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it. 4 only. The use of other sized discs may damage the A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF. CD player mechanism. • Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on away and jam the player mechanism. convertible or soft-top models (if equipped). • The Uconnect௡ 130 is a single CD player. Do not SEEK Button attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded. Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the • Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the cause damage to the player. previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
    • 348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELthe current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in Press this button while the CD is playing to activateCD and MP3 modes. Random Play. This feature plays the selections on theTIME Button compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace.Press this button to change the display from a large CDplaying time display to a small CD playing time display. Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran- domly selected track.RW/FFPress and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD Press the RND button a second time to stop Randomplayer will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or Play.RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) Notes on Playing MP3 Filesbutton works in a similar manner. The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3AM/FM Button file recording media and formats are limited. WhenPress the button to select either AM or FM mode. writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric- tions.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349Supported Media (Disc Types) display the file name and folder name, and will assign a number instead. With a maximum number of files,The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. WithCDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3. 200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in thisSupported Medium Formats (File Systems) display.)The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. • Level 1: 12 (including a separator Љ.Љ and a three-When reading discs recorded using formats other than character extension) 4ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read • Level 2: 31 (including a separator Љ.Љ and a three-files properly and may be unable to play the file nor- character extension)mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported. Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.The radio uses the following limits for file systems: Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal• Maximum number of folder levels: 8 CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files). Discs created with an option such as Љkeep disc open after• Maximum number of files: 255 writingЉ are most likely multisession discs. The use of• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in names and folder names is limited. For large numbers longer disc loading times. of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
    • 350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELSupported MP3 File Formats MPEG Sampling Bit Rate (kbps)The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten- Specification Frequency (kHz)sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3 MPEG-1 Audio 48, 44.1, 32 320, 256, 224,extension may cause playback problems. The radio is Layer 3 192, 160, 128,designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will 112, 96, 80, 64,not play the file. 56, 48, 40, 32When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to MPEG-2 Audio 24, 22.05, 16 160, 128, 144,an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the Layer 3 112, 96, 80, 64,following table are supported. In addition, variable bit 56, 48, 40, 32,rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files 24, 16, 8use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album titleVBR bit rate. are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios. Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not supported.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351Playback of MP3 Files Operation Instructions - Auxiliary ModeWhen a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, whichradio checks all files on the medium. If the medium allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as ancontains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’stime to start playing the MP3 files. audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers.Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affectedby the following: Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to 4 auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than CD-R media NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX to load than non-multisession discs audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.• Number of files and folders - Loading times will TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode) increase with more files and folders Press this button to change the display to time of day. TheTo increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition isto use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a OFF).single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” optionbefore writing to the disc.
    • 352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELUCONNECTா 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary) Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio. Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume, and to the left decreases it. When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played. Uconnect௡ 130 SEEK ButtonsOperating Instructions — Radio Mode Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the nextNOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switchACC position to operate the radio. to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353will remain tuned to the new station until you make Phone Button Uconnect௡ Phone — If Equippedanother selection. Holding either button will bypass Press this button to operate the Uconnect௡ Phone featurestations without stopping, until you release it. (if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect௡ Phone” for furtherVoice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped details.Refer to “Voice Command” for further details. If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped WithVoice Command Button Uconnect௡ Phone — Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio 4If Equipped screen.Press this button to operate the Uconnect௡ Phone feature TIME Button(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command” for furtherdetails. Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency.If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is notavailable on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With Clock Setting ProcedureUconnect Phone” message will display on the radio 1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.screen. 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ SCROLL control knob.
    • 354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ INFO Button SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call will begin to blink. letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/ message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only). SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL con- RW/FF trol knob to save time change. Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds. causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows. This feature operates in eitherThe clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button. AM or FM frequencies.For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press theSETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select TUNE ControlSET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure, Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwisestarting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the aboveprocedure, starting at Step 2. Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second MUSIC TYPE Buttontime and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Typecontrol knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE buttonmid-range tones. or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within fivePush the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third seconds will allow the program format type to be se-time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcastcontrol knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Music Type information.treble tones. 4 Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the followingPush the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth format types:time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the Program Type 16-Digit Character Displaysound level from the right or left side speakers. No program type or None undefinedPush the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth timeand FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control Adult Hits Adlt Hitknob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between Classical Classiclthe front and rear speakers. Classic Rock Cls RockPush the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to College Collegeexit setting tone, balance, and fade.
    • 356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Program Type 16-Digit Character Display Program Type 16-Digit Character Display Country Country Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B Foreign Language Language Sports Sports Information Inform Talk Talk Jazz Jazz Top 40 Top 40 News News Weather Weather Nostalgia Nostalga By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon Oldies Oldies is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency Personality Persnlty station with the same selected Music Type name. The Public Public Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode. Rhythm and Blues R&B Religious Music Rel Musc If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Religious Talk Rel Talk (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station. Rock Rock Soft Soft Soft Rock Soft Rck
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357SETUP Button button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the displayPressing the SETUP button allows you to select between window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto thisthe following items: station and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow RND button, the station will continue to play but will not you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the be stored into pushbutton memory. TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set You may add a second station to each pushbutton by the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press 4 the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL con- the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the trol knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and save time change. SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AMAM/FM Button and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected byPress the button to select either AM or FM mode. pressing the pushbutton twice.SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton Every time a preset button is used, a correspondingMemory button number will display.When you are receiving a station that you wish tocommit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
    • 358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELButtons 1 - 6 Inserting Compact Disc(s)These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CDto pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM stations). label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on theDISC/AUX Button radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more thanPressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch 1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must befrom AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode. ejected before a new disc can be loaded.Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and If you insert a disc with the ignition ON/RUN and theMP3 Audio Play radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD modeNOTE: and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will show the track number, and index time in minutes• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1. position to operate the radio.• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359 If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within CAUTION! 10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, • This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it. only. The use of other sized discs may damage the A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF. CD player mechanism. • Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on away and jam the player mechanism. convertible or soft-top models (if equipped). • The Uconnect௡ 130 is a single CD player. Do not SEEK Button 4 attempt to insert a second CD if one is already Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the loaded. CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning • Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can previous selection if the CD is within the first second of cause damage to the player. the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks inEJECT Button - Ejecting a CD CD and MP3 modes. Press the EJECT button to eject the CD. TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
    • 360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELRW/FF Notes On Playing MP3 FilesPress and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or file recording media and formats are limited. Whenanother CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-works in a similar manner. tions.AM/FM Button Supported Media (Disc Types)Press the button to select either AM or FM mode. The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660compact disc in random order to provide an interestingLevel 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.change of pace. When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to readPress the right SEEK button to move to the next ran- files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-domly selected track. mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop RandomPlay.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361The radio uses the following limits for file systems: Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal• Maximum number of folder levels: 8 CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).• Maximum number of files: 255 Discs created with an option such as Љkeep disc open after writingЉ are most likely multisession discs. The use of• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in names and folder names is limited. For large numbers longer disc loading times. of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name, and will assign Supported MP3 File Formats 4 a number instead. With a maximum number of files, The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten- exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3 200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this extension may cause playback problems. The radio is display.) designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names: not play the file. • Level 1: 12 (including a separator Љ.Љ and a three- When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to character extension) an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the • Level 2: 31 (including a separator Љ.Љ and a three- following table are supported. In addition, variable bit character extension) rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
    • 362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELuse a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or Playback of MP3 FilesVBR bit rates. When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium MPEG Sampling Bit Rate (kbps) contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more Specification Frequency (kHz) time to start playing the MP3 files. MPEG-1 Audio 48, 44.1, 32 320, 256, 224, Layer 3 192, 160, 128, Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected 112, 96, 80, 64, by the following: 56, 48, 40, 32 • Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than MPEG-2 Audio 24, 22.05, 16 160, 128, 144, CD-R media Layer 3 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32, • Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer 24, 16, 8 to load than non-multisession discs • Number of files and folders - Loading times willID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title increase with more files and foldersare supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is notsupported by the radios.Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are notsupported.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended Press the INFO button once more to return to Љelapsedto use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a timeЉ priority mode.single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds orbefore writing to the disc. more and the radio will display song titles for each file.LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) Press and hold the INFO button again for three secondsPressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders to return to Љelapsed timeЉ display.on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode 4turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting afolder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack whichbegin playing the files contained in that folder (or the allows the user to plug in a portable device such as annext folder in sequence if the selection does not contain MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’splayable files). audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers.The folder list will time out after five seconds. Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) iary device if the AUX jack is connected.Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll throughthe following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, FileName, and Folder Name (if available).
    • 364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELNOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the System Activationdevice’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio isSirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and younot loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX may begin listening immediately to the one year of audioaudio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down. service that is included with the factory-installed satelliteTIME Button (Auxiliary Mode) radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel- come kit that contains general information, includingPress this button to change the display to time of day. The how to setup your on-line listening account. For fur-time of day will display for five seconds (when the ther information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474,ignition is OFF). or visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or atUconnectா (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast- Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identificationing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to Number (ESN/SID)coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Please have the following information available whenRadio. This service offers over 130 channels of music, calling:sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios. 1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number (ESN/SID).NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and haslimited coverage in Alaska. 2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps: decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, withinESN/SID Access the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directlyWith the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi- on or above the antenna.tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll Reception Qualityusing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID isselected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of theSirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number following reasons: 4display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on • The vehicle is parked in an underground parkingthe radio to exit this screen. structure or under a physical obstacle.Selecting Uconnect௡ (Satellite) Mode • Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in thePress the SAT button until ЉSATЉ appears in the display. form of short audio mutes.A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radiomode. • Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception.Satellite Antenna • Placing objects over or too close to the antenna canTo ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the cause signal blockage.roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objectsplaced within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
    • 366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELOperating Instructions - Uconnect௡ (Satellite) INFO ButtonMode Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-ACC position to operate the radio. able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display theSEEK Buttons Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to returnPress and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next to normal display).channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek RW/FFup and the left switch to seek down. The radio willremain tuned to the new channel until you make another Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttonsselection. Holding either button will bypass channels causes the tuner to search for the next channel in thewithout stopping until you release it. direction of the arrows.SCAN Button TUNE Control (Rotary)Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwisethe next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con- to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCANbutton a second time.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367MUSIC TYPE Button SETUP ButtonPressing this button once will turn on the Music Type Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select themode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button following items:or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within • Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/five seconds will allow the program format type to be SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. Thisselected. number is used to activate, deactivate, or change theToggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music Sirius subscription. 4type. SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton MemoryBy pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type When you are receiving a channel that you wish tofunction is active, the radio will be tuned to the next commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.channel with the same selected Music Type name. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be and press and release that button. If a button is notexited and the radio will tune to the preset channel. selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but- ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
    • 368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELYou may add a second channel to each pushbutton by iPodா/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPEDrepeating the above procedure with this exception: Press NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display REL/RET radios only with Uconnect௡. For sales codewindow. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 touch-screen radioThis allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into iPod௡/USB/MP3 control feature, refer to the separatepushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2 memory RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 User’s Manual.can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice. iPod௡/USB/MP3 control is available only if equipped asEvery time a preset button is used, a corresponding an option with these radios.button number will display. This feature allows an iPod௡ or external USB device to beButtons 1 - 6 plugged into the USB port, located in the glove compart- ment.These buttons tune the radio to the channels that youcommit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations). iPod௡ control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod௡ and iPhone௡ devices. Some iPod௡ software versions mayOperating Instructions (Uconnectா Phone) — not fully support the iPod௡ control features. Please visitIf Equipped Apple’s website for software updates.Refer to “Uconnect௡ Phone” for further details.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369NOTE: Connecting The iPodா Or External USB Device• If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate Use the connection cable to connect an iPod௡ or external Uconnect௡ Multimedia radio User’s Manual for iPod௡ USB device to the vehicle’s USB connector port which is or external USB device support capability. located in the glove compartment.• Connecting an iPod௡ or consumer electronic audio device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate, plays media, but does not use the iPod௡ /MP3 control 4 feature to control the connected device. USB Connector Port
    • 370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELNOTE: The glove compartment will have a position Using This Featurewhere the iPod௡ or consumer electronic audio device By using iPod cable or external USB device to connect tocable can be routed through without damaging the cable USB port:when closing the lid. This allows routing of the cablewithout damaging it while closing the lid. If a cut out is • The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s soundnot available in the glove compartment, route the cable system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,away from the lid latch and in a place that will allow the etc.) information on the radio display.lid to close without damaging the cable. • The audio device can be controlled using the radioOnce the audio device is connected and synchronized to buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod௡ contents.the vehicle’s iPod௡/USB/MP3 control system (iPod௡ or • The audio device battery charges when plugged intoexternal USB device may take a few minutes to connect), the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specificthe audio device starts charging and is ready for use by audio device)pressing radio switches, as described below. Controlling The iPodா Or External USB DeviceNOTE: If the audio device battery is completely dis- Using Radio Buttonscharged, it may not communicate with the iPod௡/USB/MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained. To get into the iPod௡/USB/MP3 control mode and accessLeaving the audio device connected to the iPod௡/USB/ a connected audio device, either press the “AUX” buttonMP3 control system may charge it to the required level. on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and say ЉUSBЉ or ЉSwitch to USBЉ. Once in the iPod௡/USB/MP3
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio • Jump backward in the current track by pressing anddevice) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system. holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW button long enough will jump to the beginning of the currentPlay Mode track.When switched to iPod௡/USB/MP3 control mode, theiPod௡ or external USB device automatically starts Play • Jump forward in the current track by pressing andmode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio holding the FF>> button.faceplate may be used to control the iPod௡ or external • A single press backward << RW or forward FF>> will 4USB device and display data: jump backward or forward respectively, for five sec-• Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or onds. previous track. • Use the << SEEK and SEEK>> buttons to jump to the • Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while previous or next track. Pressing the SEEK>> button playing a track, skips to the next track or press the during play mode will jump to the next track in the VR button and say ЉNext TrackЉ. list, or press the VR button and say ЉNext or Previous • Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click, TrackЉ. will jump to the previous track in the list or press the • While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see VR button and say ЉPrevious TrackЉ the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.) for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
    • 372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL to the next screen of data for that track. Once all device, or press the VR button and say ЉShuffle ONЉ or screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press ЉShuffle OffЉ. If the RND icon is showing on the radio will go back to the play mode screen on the radio. display, then the shuffle mode is ON.• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio List Or Browse Mode device mode to repeat the current playing track or During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described press the VR button and say ЉRepeat ONЉ or ЉRepeat below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables OffЉ. scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the• Press the SCAN button to use iPod௡/USB/MP3 de- audio device. vice scan mode, which will play the first 10 seconds of • TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions each track in the current list and then forward to the in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the device or external USB device. desired track, when it is playing the track, press the • Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise SCAN button again. During Scan mode, pressing the (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying the << SEEK and SEEK>> buttons will select the previous track detail on the radio display. Once the track to be and next tracks. played is highlighted on the radio display, press the• RND button (available on sales code RES radio only): TUNE control knob to select and start playing the Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and track. Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod௡ or external USB
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373 through the list faster. During fast scroll, a slight • Pressing a PRESET button will display the current delay in updating the information on the radio list on the top line and the first item in that list on the display may be noticeable. second line.• During all List modes, the iPod௡ displays all lists in • To exit List mode without selecting a track, press the “wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the bottom same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode. of the list, just turn the wheel backward (counter- • LIST button: The LIST button will display the top clockwise) to get to the track faster. level menu of the iPod௡ or external USB device. Turn• In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item to be 4 shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod௡ or selected and press the TUNE control knob. This will external USB device. display the next sub-menu list item on the audio• Preset 1 – Playlists device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired• Preset 2 – Artists track in that list. Not all iPod௡ or external USB device• Preset 3 – Albums sub-menu levels are available on this system.• Preset 4 – Genres • MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is• Preset 5 – Audiobooks another shortcut button to the genre listing on your• Preset 6 – Podcasts audio device.
    • 374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) CAUTION! Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the• Leaving the iPod௡ or external USB device (or any Uconnect௡ phone system. supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in ex- treme heat or cold can alter the operation or dam- Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons age the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s To get into the BTSA mode, press either “AUX” button on guidelines. the radio or press the VR button and say “Bluetooth• Placing items on the iPod௡ or external USB device, Streaming Audio”. or connections to the iPod௡ or external USB device in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device Play Mode and/or to the connectors. When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but WARNING! some devices require the music to be initiated on the device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect௡Do not plug in or remove the iPod௡ or external USB phone system. Seven devices can be paired to thedevice while driving. Failure to follow this warning Uconnect௡ phone system, but just one can be selectedcould result in an accident. and played.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375Selecting Different Audio Device Previous Track1. Press PHONE button to begin. Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button on the radio and say “Previous Track” to jump to the2. After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say previous track music on your cellular phone. ЉSetupЉ, then ЉSelect Audio DevicesЉ. Browse3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the Uconnect௡ phone system to list audio devices. Browsing is not available on a BTSA device. Only the current song that is playing will display info. 4Next TrackUse the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on theradio and say “Next Track” to jump to the next trackmusic on your cellular phone.
    • 376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELUCONNECTா MULTIMEDIA — VIDEO • Cycle the ignition to the ON or ACC position.ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES)™ — If Equipped • Your vehicle may be equipped with either a standardGetting Started DVD player or a Blu-Ray Disc Player. If equipped with a Blu-Ray Disc Player, the icon will be present on the• Screen(s) located in the overhead console: Unfold the Player. overhead LCD screen(s) by pushing the button on the overhead console behind the screen(s). • Turn on the Player (if equipped on Dual Screen Sys- tem) by pushing the Power button, located on the far left, or by pressing the button on the Remote Control. • When the Video Screen(s) are open and a DVD is inserted into the VES™ player, the screen(s) turn(s) on automatically, the headphone transmitters turn on and playback begins. • For Dual Video Screen System, Channel 1 on the Remote Control and Headphones refers to Screen 1 (second row) and Channel 2 on the Remote Control and Headphones refers to Screen 2 (third row). Refer to the Dual Video Screen section for more information. Video Entertainment System (VES)™
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377• The system can be controlled by the front seat occu- Using the Touch-Screen Radio pants using either the touch-screen- radio, the DVD or • Press the MENU hard-key, then touch the Rear VES™ Blu-Ray Disc Player, or by the rear seat occupants soft key. If a chapter list appears on the right side of the using the remote control. screen, touch the hide list soft key to display the RearBlu-Ray Player VES™ control screen.Play A Blu-Ray Disc • Touch the 1 soft-key to select an audio channel, thenTo view a Blu-Ray insert the disc into the Blu-Ray VES™ touch the VES™ Disc soft-key in the media column. 4disc Player. Playback will begin automatically after the Using the Remote ControlBlu-Ray is recognized by the disc drive. If playback doesnot begin automatically after the disc is inserted into the • Select an audio channel (Channel 1 for 2nd row screen and Channel 2 for 3rd row screen), then press theBlu-Ray player press the play button. If playback does source key and select VES™ Disc from the menu.not begin automatically after the disc is inserted intoBlu-Ray VES™ disc Player follow these steps: • Press popup/menu key to navigate disc menu and options.
    • 378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELPlay Video GamesConnect the video game console to the Auxiliary RCAinput jacks (1 set or 2 depending on vehicle) located onthe back of the center console or on left side behind thesecond row seat. 1. Video In – Yellow 2. Left Audio In – White 3. Right Au